Nokia N72 User Manual
Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. UserâÂÂs Guide for Nokia N72
i Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights re served . DECLARA TION OF CONF ORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION, declares that this RM-180 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformit y/. Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, distribution or s torage of pa rt or all of the cont ents in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Connec ting People, Pop-Port, and Vis ual Radio are trademarks or registered trademar ks of Nokia Corporat ion. Other product and company names mentioned herein ma y be trademarks or tra denames of their respe ctive owners. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. This product includes software licensed f rom Symbian Software Ltd é 1998-2006. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademar ks of Symbian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java- based marks are t rademarks or registe red trademarks of Sun Micros ystems, In c. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Stac î, LZS î, é1996, Stac, Inc., é1994-1996 Microsoft Corporation. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Hi/fn î, LZS î,é1988-98, Hi/fn. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Ot her patents pending. Part of the software in this product is é Copy right ANT Ltd. 1998. All rightsreserved. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patent s. T9 text input s oftware Copyright é1997-2006 Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG -4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercia l use in connection wit h information which has been encoded in compliance wit h the MPEG-4 Visual Standar d by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncommerci al activity and (ii) for use in connection w ith MPEG-4 video p rovided by a licensed video pr ovider. No lic ense is grante d or shall be implied for any other use. Additiona l information, including that related to promotional, internal, and comme rcial uses, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegl a.com. Nokia o perates a policy of ongoing development. N okia reserves the right t o make changes and improve ments to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nok ia be responsible for any loss of data or inc ome or any special, incidental, consequent ia l or indirect damages howso ever caused. The contents of t his document are pr ovided âÂÂas isâÂÂ. E xcept as re quired by applicable law, no warranties of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warr anties of merchantability and f itness for a particular purpose, are made in r elation to the acc uracy, reliability or content s of this document . Nokia reserves the right to revise this doc ument or withdraw it at any time wit hout prior notice. The availability of par ticular product s may vary by region. Please c heck with the Nokia dealer nea rest to you. This device may c ontain commodities, technol ogy, or software subje ct to export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Divers ion contrary to law is prohibited. 0434 leg al-i n f orm ati on1 .fm Pag e i T u esday, F ebruar y 27, 2007 7: 5 6 PM
ii Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contents For your safety .... .............................. ..... vii Get connected ............................ .............. x Your Nokia N72 ......................... .............. 1 Help ............. ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... .. 1 Tutorial .............. ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ...... ..... 1 Useful short cuts .............. ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 1 Clock... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ...... .......... ......... .. 3 Clock settings .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 3 World clock........ ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... .. 3 Volume and loudspeake r control ... ......... ......... ......... ..... 4 File manager ........... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 4 View memory consumption ................ .......... ......... .. 5 Memory lowâÂÂfree memory ............. ......... ........... ..... 5 Memory card tool ........... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... 5 Format a memory card .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... 6 Personalise your device ........................... 7 ProfilesâÂÂset tone s ............ ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... 8 Offline profile...... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... 8 Transfer content from another device............... ........... 9 Change the look of your device .. ............ .................. ......9 Active standby mode....... ........... .............................. ....... 10 Make calls .......................... .................... 11 Calls .......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ...... ... 11 Make a confere nce call.... ......... ....... ......... ......... ..... 11 Speed dial a phone numbe r ....... ......... .......... ......... 12 Voice dialing ......... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ... 12 Answer or reject a call ........... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... 13 Call waiting ........... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ... 13 Options during a call .... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... 14 Log ............. ....... ......... ...... .......... ...... ......... ....... ......... ......... ... 14 Recent calls ...... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... 14 Call duration .............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ..... 14 Packet data ..... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ...... ... 15 Monitor all communication events ..................... 15 Contacts (Phonebook) ........................... 17 Save names and numbers ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... ... 17 Default numbers and addres ses .................. ......... 17 Copy contacts ............ ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ..... 18 SIM directory and other SIM s ervices .... ......... ... 18
iii Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Add ringing tones for contact s ................. ......... ......... .. 19 Create contact groups........ ......... ......... ......... ......... .........19 Remove members from a group .................. .........19 Camera and Gallery ..................... ......... 20 Camera ........ ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......20 Take pictures ............ ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... .. 20 Take pictures in a sequence ............. ......... ......... ....21 You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer........... ......... ......... .. 22 The flash .............. ......... ....... ......... ...... ......... ....... .........22 Adjust still image camera se ttings ......... ......... .... 22 Adjust color and lighting ...... .................. .......... ...... 23 Shooting modes ........... ........... .................. .......... ...... 23 Edit images ............... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... .........24 Record videos ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .........25 Edit video clips ........... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....27 Gallery.......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......29 View images and video clips..... ........... ............ ......29 Slide show ........... ...................... .................. .......... ...... 30 Albums .............. ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 30 PrintOnline ............ ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .... 31 Online sharing.... ...... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... .........32 Imaging ................................. ................. 35 Image prin t ........ ......... ...... .......... ...... ......... ....... ......... ....... .. 35 Printer selection ...... .......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......35 Print preview............ ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... 35 Print settings ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... 35 RealPlayer ....... ............ ...................... .................. .......... ...... 36 Play video or sound clips ......... ...................... ......... 36 Create a tra ck list .......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... .. 36 Stream content over t he air ............ ......... ......... .... 37 Receive Re alPlayer se ttings ........ ......... ......... ....... .. 37 Movie director ............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... .... 38 Create a qu ick muvee .......... ......... ....... ......... ....... .... 38 Create a cust om muvee ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... .. 38 Messaging ............................. ................. 40 Write text .......... ...... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... .. 41 Traditional text input . ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... .. 41 Predictive tex t inputâÂÂdictionary ....... ......... ......... 41 Copy text to clipboard .......... .................. .......... ...... 43 Write and send mes sages ............... ...... ......... .......... ...... 43 Receive MMS and e-mail se ttings............ ........... 45 InboxâÂÂrecei ve messages .......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .... 46 Multimedia me ssages............ ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 46 Data and se ttings . ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .. 46 Web service me ssages.............. ......... ......... ....... ...... 47 My folders ............ ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... .... 47 Mailbox ........... ............ ............................... ......... ................ 47 Open the mailbox ........ ........... .................. ................ 48 Retrieve e-mail messa ges ......... ......... ......... ......... .. 48
iv Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Delete e-mail me ssages ... ......... ......... ......... ......... ... 49 Disconnect from the mailbox ........... ......... ......... ... 50 OutboxâÂÂmessage s waitin g to be se nt ................ ....... 50 View message s on a SIM card ............... ......... ....... ....... 51 Messaging settings ............ ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ... 51 Text message s .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 51 Multimedia messages ................ ......... ....... ......... ..... 52 E-mail............. ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 53 Web servic e messa ges ............. ......... ....... ......... ....... 54 Cell broadcast ... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ....... 54 Other settings .............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ... 55 Radio ............ ....................... ................... 56 Listen to the ra dio .............. ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... ... 56 View visual content ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 57 Saved stat ions .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ....... 57 Settings ............... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... 58 Calendar.............................. ................... 59 Create calendar entries..... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 59 Set a calendar alarm.............. ......... ......... ....... ......... 60 Calendar vie ws ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 60 Delete calendar entries ........ ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... 60 Calendar s ettings................ ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ..... 61 Web ..................... ............................... .....62 Access the Web ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ..... 62 Receive brows er se ttings.......... ......... ......... ....... ..... 62 Enter the settings ma nually ........... ......... ......... ..... 62 Bookmarks view.............. ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 63 Add bookmarks manually ......... ........... ............ ....... 63 Send bookmarks ........ ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 63 Make a conn ection .......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ....... 63 Connection security ................. ....... ......... ......... ....... 64 Browse............. ......... ...... .......... ...... ......... ....... ......... ....... ..... 64 View saved pa ges ............ ......... ......... ......... ....... ....... 65 Download an d purchase items .............. ......... ......... ..... 65 End a connection ............. ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ..... 66 Empty the cache ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ....... 66 Web settings........... ...... .......... ......... ...... ......... .......... ...... ... 66 My own ...................................... ............. 68 Games .............. ...... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ..... 68 Music play er ........... ......... ....... ......... ...... ......... .......... ...... ... 68 Play music ........... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ..... 68 Playlists .............. ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 69 Go toâÂÂadd shortcuts.............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 69 Delete a shortcut ............. ......... ......... ......... ....... ....... 69
v Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. IMâÂÂinstant me ssaging (chat) ................. ......... ......... .... 70 Receive IM settings ................ ....... ......... ......... .........70 Connect to a n IM server ....... ......... ......... .......... ......70 Modify your IM settings ....... .................. .......... ...... 70 Search for IM groups and us ers ........ ........... .........71 Join and leave a n IM group .......... ......... .......... ......71 Chat ........ ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......71 View and sta rt conversations ... ......... ......... ......... .. 72 IM contact s . ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ...... .......... ......72 Manage IM groups ............. ......... ......... ......... ....... .... 73 Chat server sett ings ......... ......... ...... ......... .......... ......73 Connectivity .. ............................... ......... 74 Bluetooth conne ctivity ........... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......74 Bluetooth connectivity settings .................. .........75 Send data using Bluetoot h connectivity ............75 Pair devices ........... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....76 Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity....... 77 Switch off Bluetooth conn ectivity.............. .........77 PC connections.......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .... 77 CD-ROM ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....78 Your device as a mode m .......... ...................... ......... 78 Connection ma nager .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .. 78 View data connection de tails .......... ........... ......... .. 79 Remote synch ronisation............. ....... ......... ......... ......... .. 79 Create a new sync hronisation profile ............... .. 79 Synchronise da ta ........... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... 80 Device manager .......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .... 81 Server profile settings ................ ......... ......... ......... .. 81 Office ............. ....................... ................. 82 Calculator .......... ...... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... .. 82 Converter ........... ...... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 82 Set base currenc y and exchange ra tes ............... 83 To-do............ ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ...... .......... ...... 8 3 Notes.......... ...... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... .... 84 Recorder ............... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ...... 8 4 Tools ...................... ............................... .. 85 Settings .............. ......... ......... ....... ......... ...... ......... ....... ......... 85 Phone settings ................ ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 85 Call settings ................ ....... ......... ...... ......... .......... ...... 86 Connection settings .................. ...... ......... .......... ...... 87 Date and time ............... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... .... 90 Security .......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... .... 90 Call diverting .............. ....... ......... ...... ......... ....... ......... 93 Call barring ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ...... 9 3 Network ........ ....... ......... ....... ......... ...... ......... ....... ......... 93 Enhancement se ttings........... ......... ......... ....... ......... 9 4
vi Copyright é 2 006 Nokia. A ll rights rese rved. Voice comm ands ...... ........ ....... ....... .... ....... ....... ....... ....... ... 94 Application ma nager ...... ....... ... ........ ....... ....... ....... .... ...... 9 5 Install a pplications a nd so ftware . ....... ....... .... ...... 9 5 Remove a pplications a nd softwa re .... ....... ....... ... 9 6 Application settings ... ....... .... ....... ....... ....... ........ ... ... 9 7 Activation keysâÂÂhandle copyright-pro tected f iles . ....... .... ....... ....... ....... ........ ... ... 97 Troubleshooting .................................... 98 Q&A . ... ........ ....... ....... ....... .... ....... ....... ....... ....... .... ....... ....... ... 98 Battery information ........ ................... 101 Chargin g and dis charging .... ....... ....... ....... .... ....... ....... 10 1 Nokia batte ry authen tication guideline s .. ....... ....... 10 Nokia original enhanceme nts ........ .... 104 Battery ....... ... ....... ....... ........ ... ....... ........ ....... ....... ... ........ ... 105 Nokia Wireless Boom Heads et HS-4W ...... ....... ....... 106 Nokia Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-6W .. ... 106 Nokia Wireless Keyboard SU-8W ..... .... ....... ....... ....... 107 Care and mainte nance .... ................... 108 Additional safety information ....... .... 109 Index ................................. ............... .... 112 R1140_enT OC.fm Page v i Tuesday , Febru ary 27, 2007 7: 43 PM 2
vii Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete us er guide for further in forma tion. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interfer ence or danger. ROAD SAFETY COME S FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFEREN CE All wireless devices ma y be susceptible to interferenc e, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireles s devices can ca use interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELIN G Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device wher e blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIF IED SER VICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair t his product. ENHANCEM ENTS AN D BATTERIE S Use only approved enhancements and bat teries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTA NCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information.
viii Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. CONNECTING TO OT HER DEVICES When connecting to any o ther devic e, read it s user guide for detailed s afety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGE NCY CALLS Ensure the phone function of the device is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the start screen. Enter the emergency nu mber, then press the call k ey. Give your loca tion. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wirel ess dev ice des cribe d in this guide is approved for use on the EGSM 900/1800/1900 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws, and respect privacy and legitimate right s of others. When taking and using images or video clips, obey all laws, and respec t local customs as we ll as privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this devic e, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wire less device use may cause interference or danger. Network servic es To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of th e features in this device depend on features in the wi reless network to function. These network services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilize network services. Your service provid er may need to give you additional instructions for th eir use and explain what charges will apply. Some netw orks may have l imitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent characters an d services . Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially configur ed. This configuration may include cha nges in menu names, menu order, and icons. Cont act your servic e provider for more i nformation.
ix Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) t hat run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, e-mail and content downloading using the browser or over MMS, require network support for these technologies. For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendo r. This may be the service provider, network operator, or other vendor. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device off, and disc onnect the charg er before remov ing the battery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from a DC-4, AC-3, and AC-4 charger, and from an AC-1, ACP-8, ACP- 9, ACP-12, LCH-8, LCH-9, or LCH-12 charge r when used with the CA-44 charger adapter. The battery in tended for use with this device is BL-5C. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The us e of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty and may be dangerous. For availability of ap proved enhancements, pleas e check with your deal er. When you dis connec t the po wer cor d of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
x Copyright é 2 006 Nokia. A ll rights rese rved. Get connected Use your device on t he 2G ne twork. Se e â About you r device âÂÂ, p. vi ii . Use Bluetooth t echnolo gy to transfer files and conne ct to compa tible enha nceme nts. See â Bluetooth conn ectivit y âÂÂ, p. 74 . Use a compa tible USB data cable, for instan ce th e Nokia Connectivity Cable CA-53, t o connect to compatible devices, such as printers and PCs. U s e a c o m p a t i b l e m e m o r y c a r d t o t r an s f e r d a t a o r b a c k u p infor mation. See â Memory card tool âÂÂ, p. 5 . Get_conn ected.fm Pag e x Tu esday, Febr uary 27, 2007 8:55 PM
Your Nokia N72 1 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N72 Model number: Nokia N72-5 Hereinafter referre d to as Nokia N72. Help Your device has context-sensiti ve help. You can access the help from an application or from the main menu. When an application is open, to access help for the curren t view, select Options > Help . Example: To view instructions on how to create a contact card, star t to create a contact card, and select Option s > Help . When you ar e reading th e instructi ons, to switch between help and the application that is open in the background, press and hold . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Help . Select the desired application to view a lis t of help topics. To search for help topics using keywords, select Options > Search by keyword . When you are reading a help topic, to view other related topics, press or . Tutorial The tutorial gives you information about some of the features of your device. To view the tutorial, insert the memory card into your device, press , and select My own > Tutorial and the section yo u want to view. Useful shortcuts Use shortcuts to quickly get the most from your device. Refer to the relevant sections in this user guide for further details of the functions. Take pictures ⢠To adjust image setup settings before taking a picture, pres s . ⢠After taking a picture, to send the image, press and select Via multimedia , Vi a e-mail , or Via Bluetooth . For more information, see â Messaging âÂÂ, p. 40 and â Bluetooth connectivity âÂÂ, p. 74 . ⢠To delete an image, press .
Your Nokia N72 2 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠To take a new picture, p ress or the camera capture key. Record video clips ⢠To adjust video setup settings before recording video, press . ⢠After recording a video clip, to send the video, press and select Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth . You cannot send video clips saved in the mp4 format in a multimedia message. For more information, see â Messaging âÂÂ, p. 40 and â Bluetooth connect ivity âÂÂ, p. 74 . ⢠To delete a video clip, press . Edit text and lists ⢠To mark an item in a list, scro ll to it, and press and at the same time. ⢠To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold while you press or . To end the selection, release , then release . ⢠To copy and paste text: To select letters and words, press and hold . At the same time, press or . As the selection moves , text is highlighted. To copy the text to clipboard, while still holding , select Copy . To insert the text into a document, press and hold , and select Paste . Standby mode ⢠To switch between applications that are open, press and hold . If memory is low, the device may close some applications . The device saves any unsav ed data before closing an application. Leaving applications r unning in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. ⢠To change the profile, pres s , and select a profile. ⢠To switch between General and Silent profiles, press and hold . If you have two phone lines, this action switches between the two lines. ⢠To open the last dialled numbers list, press . ⢠To use voice commands, press and hold . ⢠To start a connection to Web , press and hold . See â Web âÂÂ, p. 62 . For furthe r shortcut s availa ble in the standby mode, see â Active standby mode âÂÂ, p. 10 . Keypad lock (keyguard) ⢠To lock: In the standby mode, press , then . ⢠To unlock: Press , then . ⢠To turn on the display light when the keypad lock is on, press . When the keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device.
Your Nokia N72 3 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Clock Press , and select Clock . To set a new alar m, select Options > Set al arm . Enter the alarm time, and select OK . When the alar m is active, is shown. To turn off the alarm, select Stop . When th e alarm tone sounds, select Snooze to stop the alarm for five minutes, after which it resumes. You can do this a maximum of five times. If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop , the device as ks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. To cancel an alarm, select Clo ck > Options > Remove alarm . Clock settings To chang e the cloc k setti ngs, select Options > Sett ings in the clock. To change the time or date, select Time or Date . To change the clock shown in the standby mode, scro ll down, and sele ct Clock ty pe > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone network to update the time, date, and time zone information to your device (network service), scroll down, and select Au to time update . For the Auto time update setting to take effect, the device restarts. To change the alarm tone, sc roll down, and select Clock alar m tone . To change the daylight-saving time status, scroll down, and select Daylight-saving . Select On to add 1 hour to the My current city time. See â World clock âÂÂ, p. 3 . When the daylight-saving is active, is shown in the clock main view. This setting is not shown if Auto ti me update is on. World clock Open Clock , and press to open the world clock view. In the world clock view, you can view th e time in different cities. To add cities to the list, s elect Options > Add city . Enter the first letters of the city name. The search field appears automatically, and the matching cities are displayed. Select a cit y. You ca n add a maximum of 15 cities to the list.
Your Nokia N72 4 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To set your current city, scroll to a city, and select Options > My current city . The city is displayed in the clock main vi ew, and the time in your devi ce is changed according to the city select ed. Check that the time is correct and matches your time zone. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the volume level when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, press or . The built-in loudspeaker allows you to sp eak and listen from a short distance without ha ving to hol d the device to your ear. Sound applications use the loudspeaker by default. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeaker during a call, start a call, and select Options > Activate lou dsp. . To turn off the loudspeaker when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, select Options > Activate handset . File manager Many features of the device use memory to store data . These features inclu de contac ts, messages, images, ringing tones, calendar and to-do notes, documents, and downloaded applications. The free memory available depends on how much data is already sa ved in the device memory. You can use a compatible memory card as extra storage space. Memory cards ar e rewritable, so you can delete and save data on a memory card. To browse files and folders in the device memory o r on a compatible memory card (if inserted), press , and select Tools > File mgr. . The device memory view ( ) opens. Press to open the memory card view ( ). To move or copy files to a folder, press and at the same time to mark a file, and select Options > Move to folder or Copy to folder . To find a file, s elect Options > Fi nd and the memory from which to search, and enter a search text that matc hes the file name. Tip! You can use Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite to view the different memories in your device. See the CD-ROM supplied with your dev ice.
Your Nokia N72 5 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. View memory consumption To view what types of data you have in the device and how much memory the differen t data types consume , select Option s > Memory detai ls > Phone memory . Scroll down to Fre e memory to view the amount of free memory in the device. To view the amou nt of free memory on a memor y card, if you have a compatible card inserted in the device, select Option s > Memory details > Memory card . Scro ll down to Free memory to view the amount of free memory on the memory card. Memory lowâÂÂfree memory The device notifies you if the device memory or memory card memory is getting low. To free device memory, transfer data to a compatible memory card in the file manage r. Mark files to be moved, select Options > Move to fol der > Memory card , and a folder. Tip! To free memory from the device or from a memory card, use Image Store available in Nokia PC Suite to transfer images and video clips to a compatible PC. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. To remove data to free memory, use File mgr. , or go to the respective application. For example, you can remove the following: ⢠Message s from I n box , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messagin g ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages f rom the device memory ⢠Saved Web pages ⢠Saved images, videos, or sound files ⢠Conta ct information â¢C a l e n d a r n o t e s ⢠Downloaded applications. See also â Appli cation manager âÂÂ, p. 95 . ⢠Any other data that you no longer need Memory card tool Note: This device uses a Reduced Size Dual Voltage (1.8 or 3V) MultiMediaCard (RS-M MC). To ensure interoperability, use only dual voltage RS-MMCs. Check the compatibility of an RS-MMC with its manufacturer or provider. Use only Reduced Size MultiMediaCards (RS-MMC) approved by Nokia for us e with this device. Nok ia utilizes the approved industry st andards for memory car ds but not all other brands may function correctly or be fully compatible with this device.
Your Nokia N72 6 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Press , and select Tools > Memory . You can use a compatible memory ca rd as extra stor age space. It is a lso good to regularly b ack up th e information in the device memory to a memory card. The in formation can be restored to the device later. You cannot use the memory card if the door of the memory card slo t is open . Important: Do not remove the memory card in the middle of an operation when the card is being accessed. Removing the card in the middle of an operation may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stor ed on the card may be corrupte d. To back up informa tion from device memory to a compatible memory card, select Options > Backup phone mem. . To restore in formation from a compatible memory card to the device memory, select Option s > Restore from card . Tip! To rename a memory card, select Options > Memory card name . Format a memory card When a memory card is reformatted, all da ta on the card is permanently lost. Some memory cards are supplie d preformatted and others require forma tting. Co nsult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory ca rd before you ca n use it. To forma t a mem ory card , select Options > Format mem. card . Select Yes to confirm. When formatting is complete, enter a name for the memory card, and select OK .
Personalise your device 7 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your device Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain featur es be di sabled or not a ctivated in yo ur devic e. If so , they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially co nfigured for your network provider. This configuration may include changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more in formation . ⢠To use the standby display for fast access to your most frequently used applications, see â Active sta ndby mode âÂÂ, p. 10 . ⢠To change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the power saver, see â Change the look of your device âÂÂ, p. 9 . ⢠To customise the ringing tones, see â ProfilesâÂÂset tones âÂÂ, p. 8 . ⢠To change the shortcuts assigned for the different presses of the scroll key and left and right selection keys in the standby mode, see â Standby mode âÂÂ, p. 85 . The scroll key shor tcuts are not available if the active standby is on. ⢠To change the clock shown in the standby mode, press , and sel ect Clock > Options > Se ttings > Clock type > Analogue or Digital . ⢠To change the clock alarm tone, press , and select Clock > Options > Settings > Clock Alarm t one an d a tone. ⢠To change the ca lendar alarm ton e, press , and select Calendar > Options > Settin gs > Calendar alarm tone and a tone. ⢠To change the welcome note to a text or an image, press , and select Tools > Sett ings > Phone > General > Welcome note or logo . ⢠To assign an individual ringing tone to a contact, press , and sel ect Cont acts . See â Add ringing tones for contacts âÂÂ, p. 19 . ⢠To assign a speed dial to a contact, press a number key in the standby mode ( is reserved for the voice mailbox), and press . Select Yes , then select a contact. ⢠To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folder . You can move less used applications into folders, and place applications that you use more often into the main menu.
Personalise your device 8 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. ProfilesâÂÂset tones To set and customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environme nts, or caller groups, press , and select Tools > Profile s . If the currently selected profile is other than General , the profile name is shown at the t op of the display in the standby mode. To change the profile, pre ss in the standby mode. Scroll to t he profile you wa nt to ac tivate, and select OK . To modify a profile, press , and select Tools > Profiles . Scroll to t he profile, and select Options > Personalise . Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the choices. Tones stored on a memory card are indicated with . You can sc roll through the tone list and listen to each one before you make your selection. Press any key to stop the sound. Tip! In the list of tones, Tone downloads opens a list of bookmarks. You can sele ct a bookmark and start connection to a Web page to download tones. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new . Offline profile The Offlin e profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless network. When you activate the Offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area. All wireless ph one signals to and from the device are prevented. If you try to send messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. Warning: In the offline profil e you cannot make or receive any calls, except make ca lls to certain emergency numbers, or use other features that require network coverage. To make ca lls, you must first activate the phone function by changing profiles. If the device ha s been locked, enter the lock code. Warning: Your device must be switc hed on to use Offline profile. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. To leave the Offline profile, press , and select another profile. The device re-enabl es wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient si gnal strength ). If Bluetooth connectivity is activated before entering the Offline profile, it will be deactivated. Bluetooth connectivity is automatically reactivated after leaving the Offline profile. See â Bluetooth connectiv ity setting s âÂÂ, p. 75 .
Personalise your device 9 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Transfer content from another device You can copy cont acts, calendar, imag es, video, and sound clips using Bluetooth connectivity, from a compatible Nokia Series 60 device. You can use your Nokia N72 without a SIM card. The offline profile is au tomatically activated when the device is switched on without a SIM card. This allows you to use the SIM card in another device. To avoid duplicate entries, yo u can transfer the same type of information (for example , contacts) from the other device to your Nokia N72 only once. Before star ting the transfer, you must ac tivate Blu etooth connectivity on both devices. On each device, press , and select Connect. > Bluetooth . Select Bluetooth > On . Give a name to each device. To transfer content: 1 Press , and select Tools > Transfer on your Nokia N72. Follow the instru ctions on the screen. 2 The device searches for other devices with Bluetooth connectivity. When it ha s finished t he search, select your other device from the list. 3 You are asked to enter a cod e on your Nokia N72. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and sel ect OK . En t er the same code on the other device, and select OK . 4 The Tran sfer application is sent to the other device as a message. 5 Open the message to install Transfer on the other device, and follow the instructions on the screen. 6 From your Nokia N72, select the content you wa nt to copy from the other device. Content is copied from the memory and memory card of the other device to your Nokia N72 and memory card. Copying time depends on th e amount of data to be transferred. You can cancel copying and continue later. The Transfer application is add ed to the main menu of the other dev ice. Change the look of your device To change the look of the di splay, such as the wallpaper and icons, press , and select Tools > Themes . The active theme is indicated by . In Themes you can group together elements from other themes or select images from the Gallery to personalise theme s further. The themes on the memory card are indicated by . Th e themes on the memory card are not a vaila ble if the memory card is not inserted in the device. I f you want to use the themes saved in the memory card withou t the memory card, save the themes in the device memory first.
Personalise your device 10 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To open a browser connection and download more themes, select The me downloads . To activate a theme, scroll to it, and select Options > Apply . To preview a theme, scroll to it, and select Options > Preview . To edit themes, scroll to a theme, and select Optio ns > Edit to change the following options: Wallpaper âÂÂThe image to be shown as a background image in the standby mode. Power saver âÂÂThe power saver type on the display: date and time, or a text you ha ve written yourself. See also â Display âÂÂ, p. 86. Image in 'Go to' âÂÂTh e background image for the Go to application. To restore the selected theme back to its original settings, select Op tions > Restore orig. theme when you edit a theme. Active standby mod e Use your standby display for fast access to your most frequently used applications . By default, the active standby mode is on. Press , select Tools > Settings > Phone > Standby mode > Active standb y , and press to switch the active standby on or off. The active standby display is shown with default applications acros s the top of the screen. Scroll to an application or event, and press . The standard scroll key shortcuts available in the standby mode cannot be used when the active standby mode is on. To change the default appli cations shortcuts: 1 Press , select Tools > Settings > Phone > Standby mode > Active standby apps. , and press . 2 Highlight a shortcut to an application, and select Options > Ch ange . 3 Select a new application fr om the list, and press . Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you are not able to change them.
Make calls 11 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls Calls Tip! To increase or decrease the volume during a call, pres s or . If you have set the volume to Mute , you cannot adjust the volume with the scroll key. To a djust th e volume , select Unmute , and press or . 1 In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. Press to remove a number. For international calls, p ress twice for the character (replaces the inte rnational access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Press to cal l the number. 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Pressing always ends a call, even if another application is active. To make a call from Contacts , pr ess , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name; or enter the first letters of the name to the sear ch field. Matching contacts are listed. Press to call. Select the call type Voice call . You must copy the contacts from your SIM car d to Contacts before yo u can make a call this way. See â Copy contacts âÂÂ, p. 18 . To call your voice mailbox (n etwork service), press and hold in the standby mode. See also â Call diverting âÂÂ, p. 93 . Tip! To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, press , and select Tools > Voice mail > Options > Change numbe r . Enter the number (obtained from your service provider), and select OK . To call a recently dialed number in the standby mode, press to access a list of the 20 last numbers you called or attempted to call. Scroll to the number yo u want, and press to call the number. Make a conference call 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Options > New call . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first partic ipant in the conf erence ca ll, se lect Options > Conference .
Make calls 12 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Options > Conference > Add to conference . The device supports conf erence call s between a maximum of six participan ts, including yourself. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select Option s > Conference > Pri vate . Select a participant, and select Private . The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still cont inue the conference call. After you finish the private conversation, select Options > Add to conference to return to the conference ca ll. To drop a participant, select Option s > Conference > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conference call, press . Speed dial a phone number To activate speed dialing, press , and select Tools > Settings > Call > Speed dialling > On . To assign a phone number to on e of the speed dialing keys (âÂÂ) , p r e s s , a n d s e l e c t Tools > Speed dial . Scroll to the key to whi ch you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . is reser ved for the voice mailbox. To call in the standby mode, press the speed dial key and . Voice dialing Your device supports enhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not dependent on the speakerâÂÂs voice, so the user does not r ecord voice tags in advance. Instead, the device creates a voice tag for the entries in contacts, and compares the spoken voice tag to it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognize the voice commands better. The voice tag for a contac t is the name or ni ckname that is saved on the contact card. To listen to the synthesized voice tag, open a contact card , and select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be diffi cult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. When you use voice dialing, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a short dist ance away when you say the voice tag.
Make calls 13 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1 To start voice d ialing, press and hold . If you are using a compatible headset with the headset key, press and hold the headset key to start voice dialing. 2 A short tone is played, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name or nickna me that is save d on the contact card. 3 The device plays a synthesized voice tag for the recognized contac t in the selected device langua ge, and displays the name and number. After a time-out of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognized contact was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches, or Quit to cancel voice dialing. If several numbers are saved under the name, the device selects the default number, if it has been set. Otherwise the device selects the first available number of the following: Mobile , Mobile (home ) , Mobile (business) , Teleph one , Tel. (home) , and Tel. (b usiness) . Answer or reject a call To answer the call, press . To mute the ringing tone when a call comes in, select Silence . Tip! If a compatible headset is connected to the device, to answer and end a call, press the headset key. If you do not wa nt to answer a call, press to reject it. The caller hears a line bu sy tone. If you have activated the Call divert sett ings > Voice calls > If busy func tion to divert calls, rejecting an incoming call als o diverts the call. See â Call diverting âÂÂ, p. 93 . When you reject an incoming call, you can also se nd a text message to the caller informing why you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send text message . You can edit the text before sending it. See also Reject call with SMS , p. 86 . Call waiting You can answer a call while you have another call in progress if you have activated Call waiting (network service) in Tools > Settin gs > Call > Call waiting . Tip! To chang e the device to nes for different environments and events (for example, wh en you want your device to be sile nt), see â ProfilesâÂÂset tones âÂÂ, p. 8 . To answer the waiting call, press . The first call is put on hold.
Make calls 14 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To switch bet ween the two cal ls, select Swap . Select Options > Transfer t o connect an incoming call or a call o n h o l d w i t h a n a c t i v e c a l l a n d t o d i s c o n n e c t y o u r s e l f f r o m the calls. To end the active call, press . To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Options during a call Many of the options that you can use during a call are network services. Select Options during a call for some of the following options: Mute or Unm ute , Answe r , Reject , Swap , Hold or Un hold , Act ivate handset , A ctivate loudsp. , or Activate handsfree (if a compatible headset with Bluetooth connec tivity is attached), End active call or End all calls , New call , Conference , and Transfer. Select from the following: Replace âÂÂto end an active call and replace it by answering the waiti ng call. Send DTMF âÂÂto send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password). Enter th e DTMF string or search f or it in Contacts . To enter a wait chara cter ( w ) or a pause characte r ( p ), press repeatedly. Select OK to s en d t he tone. Tip! You can add DTMF t ones to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a co ntact car d. Log Recent calls To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dialed calls, press , and select My own > Log > Recent calls . The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. Tip! When you see a note in th e standby mode about missed calls, select Show to access the list of missed calls. To call back, scroll to a name or number, and press . To clear all rece nt call lists, select Option s > Clear recent calls in the recent calls main view. To clear one of the call registers, open the register you want to erase, and select Options > Cle ar list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and press . Call duration To monitor the approximate dura tion of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select My own > Log > Call duration .
Make calls 15 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Options > Clear timers . For this you need the lock code. See â Security âÂÂ, â Phone and SIM âÂÂ, p. 90. Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connections, press , and select My own > Log > Pack et data . For example, you may be charged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Icons in Log : Incoming Outgoing Missed communication events To monitor all voice and video calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the device, press , select My own > Log , and press the scroll key to the right to open the general l og. For each communication event, you can see the sender or recipient name, phone number, n ame of the service provider, or access point. You can filter the general log to view just one type of event and create new contact cards based on the log information. Tip! If y ou want to see the duration of a voice call on the main display during an active call, select Opt ions > Settings > Show call duration > Yes . Tip! To view a list of sent messages, press , and select Messa ging > Sent . Subevents, such as a text message sent in more than one part and packet data connec tions, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging cent er, or Web pages are shown as packet data connectio ns. To filter the log, select Options > Fi lter and a filter.
Make calls 16 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To erase the contents of the l og, recent calls register, and messaging delivery repo rt s permanently, select Option s > Clear log . Selec t Yes to confirm. To set the Log durati on , select Options > Settings > Log duration . The log events r emain in the device memory for a set number of days after which they are automatically erased to free memory. I f you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls regist er, and messagi ng delivery reports are permanently deleted. To view the details of a commun ication event, in the general log view scroll to an event, and press the scroll key. Tip! In t he details view you can copy a phone number to the clipboard, and paste it to a text message, for e xample. Select Options > Copy Number . Packet data counter and connecti on timer : To view how much data, measured in kiloby tes, is trans ferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated b y Pack. , and select Options > View de tails .
Contacts (Phonebook) 17 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) Press , and select Contacts . In Contacts you can add a personal ringin g tone or a thumbnai l image to a cont act card. You can als o create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-ma il to many recipients at the same time. You can add r eceived contact information (business cards) to contacts. See â Data and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . Contact information can only be sent to or received from compatible devices. Tip! Regularly back up the information on the device to a compatible memory card. Y o u can restore the information, such as contacts, to the device later. See â Memory ca rd tool âÂÂ, p. 5 . You can also use Nokia PC Suite to back up your contacts to a compatible PC. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Save names and numbers 1 Select Options > New con tact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit conta ct cards in Contact s , scroll to the co ntact card you want to edit, a nd select Options > Edit . To delete a contact card in Contacts , select a card, and press . To delete se veral contact cards at the same time, press and to mark the contacts, and press to dele te. Tip! To add and edit conta ct cards, use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. To attach a small thumbnail imag e to a co ntact ca rd, open the cont act card , and se lect Opt ions > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. Tip! To send contact information, s elect the card you want to send. Select Option s > Send > Via text message , Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetoo th . See â Messaging âÂÂ, p. 40 and â Send data using Bluetooth connectivity âÂÂ, p. 75 . Default numbers and addresses You can assign default number s or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a messa ge to the contact to a certain number or a ddress. The default number is also used in voice dialling. 1 In contacts, select a cont act, and press .
Contacts (Phonebook) 18 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you wan t to add a number or an address and Assign . 4 Select a number or an addr ess you want to set as a default. Copy contacts If you have phone numbers st ored on the SIM card, copy them to Contacts . Entries that are saved only on the SIM card are not shown in the contacts d irectory, and for incoming calls and messages, the device cannot match the number to the name. When a new SIM card is inserted in the device and you open Contacts for the first time, you are asked if you want to copy the contact entries on the SIM card to the device memory. Select Yes to copy the entries to your contacts directory. To copy individual names and numbers from a SIM card to your device, press , and select Cont acts > Optio ns > SIM contacts > SIM directory . Select the names you want to copy and Options > Copy to Contacts . To copy contacts to your SIM card , press , and select Contacts . Select the names y ou want to copy and Options > Copy to SIM direct. , or Options > Copy > To SIM directory . Only the contact card fiel ds supported by your SIM card are copied. Tip! You can synch ronise your contacts to a compatible PC with Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied wi th your device. SIM directory and other SIM services For availability and information on using SIM c ard services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service provider, network operator, or other vendor. Press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory to see th e names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In the SIM directory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, and you can make calls. To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, select Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dialling contacts . This setting is only shown if supported by your SIM card. To rest rict ca lls fro m your de vice to select ed phon e numbers, select Op tions > Activ. fixed dialling . To add new numbers to the fixed dialling list, select Op tion s > New SIM contact . You need the PIN2 code for these functions. When you use Fixed dialling , packet data connections are not possible, except when sending text messages over a packet data connection. In th is case, the message centre number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialling list.
Contacts (Phonebook) 19 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. When fixed dialing is activated, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into y our device. Add ringing tones for contacts When a contact or group member calls you, the device plays the chosen ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and your device recognises it). 1 Press to open a contact card, or go to the groups list, and select a contact g roup. 2 Select Options > Ringin g tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you wish to use for the individual contact or the selected group. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Create contact groups 1 In Contacts , press to open the groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group , and select OK . 4 Open the group, and select Options > Add membe rs . 5 Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Sele ct OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a group, select Options > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1 In the groups list, open the group you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remove from grou p . 3 Sele ct Yes to remove the contact from the group. Tip! To check to which groups a contact belongs, scroll to the contact, and s elect Options > Belongs to groups .
Camera and Gallery 20 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery Camera Your Nokia N72 has a high resolution camera on the back of the device that can be us ed to take still images and videos. To activate the camera, open the camera lens cover on the back of the device. The Camera application starts wh en the camera is activated, and you can see the view to be captured. In Camera , you can take pictures and record videos. To move between still image and video capture, select Op tions > Image mode or Video mode . The images and video clips ar e automatic ally saved in the Gallery . The came ras produce .jpeg images, and v ideo clips are recorded in the 3GPP f ile format with the .3gp file extension ( Normal video quality modes) or in the .mp4 file format ( High v ideo quality mode). See â Video settings âÂÂ, p. 26 . You can also send ima ges or a video in a multimedia message as an e-mail attachme nt, or by using Bluetooth connecti vity. Tip! You can insert a n image into a contact card. See â Save names and numbers âÂÂ, p. 17 . Your Nokia N72 supports an im age capture resolution of up to 1600 x 1200 pixels using the camera. The ima ge resolution in these materi als may appear different. Take pictures To make lighting and color adjustments before taking a picture, s elect Options > Image setup > Shooting mode , Flash , White balance , or Colour tone . See â Adjust color and lighting âÂÂ, p. 23 and â Shooting mo des âÂÂ, p. 23 . Tip! You can press the key or use the camera capture key (located on th e right hand side of the device) for still image capture. Camera indicators show the following: ⢠The device memory ( ) and memor y card ( ) indicators (1) show where images are saved. ⢠The images indicator (2) estimates how many images, depending on the selected image quality, can fit in the remaining memory of your device or a compatible memory card.
Camera and Gallery 21 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠The mode indicator (3) shows the active mode. See â Shooting modes âÂÂ, p. 23. ⢠The flas h indicato r (4) shows if the flash is set to Automatic () , On/ forced () , o r Off () . ⢠The resolution indicator (5) shows the selected image quality. See â Adj ust still image camera settings âÂÂ, p. 22 . ⢠The sequence mode indicator (6) shows that the sequence mode is active. See â Take pictures in a sequence âÂÂ, p. 21 . ⢠The self-timer indica tor (7) shows that the self-timer is activated. See â You in the pictureâÂÂself- timer âÂÂ, p. 22 . Saving the captured image may take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or color settings. When taking a picture, note the followin g: ⢠It is recommended to use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠To take images or record video in different environments, use the correct mode for each environment. See â Sh ooting modes âÂÂ, p. 23 . ⢠The quality of a zoomed pict ure is lower than that of a non-zoomed picture. ⢠The camera goes into the ba ttery saving m ode if there are no key presses within a minute. To continue taking pictures, press . After the image is taken, note the following: ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, press . ⢠To send the image, press and select Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth . For more information, see â Messaging âÂÂ, p. 40 and â Bluetooth connecti vity âÂÂ, p. 74 . This option is not available during an active call. ⢠To send an image to the other party during an active call, select Options > Send to caller . ⢠To edit the picture, select Optio ns > Edit . See â Edit images âÂÂ, p. 24 . ⢠To print the picture, select Options > Print . See â Image print âÂÂ, p. 35 . Take pictures in a sequence To set the camera to take pictur es in a sequence with a single press of the key or the camera capture key, select Options > Sequence mode . If you press and hold the key or the camera capture key, image capture continues until you release the key. You can capture up to 100 images, depending on the available mem ory.
Camera and Gallery 22 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. You can also use the sequence mode with the Activate self tim er . See â You in the pictureâÂÂself-timerâÂÂ, p. 22 . If the self-timer is activated, a ma ximum of six pictures can be captured. The pictures are automatically saved in Ga llery . You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer Use the self-timer to delay the taking of a picture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, select Option s > Activate self timer > 10 seconds , 20 seconds , or 30 second s . To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The self -timer indicator ( ) blinks and the device beeps when the timer is running. The camera takes the picture af ter the selected delay has elapsed. You can also use the Activate self timer in the sequence mode. See â Take pictures in a sequence âÂÂ, p. 21 . The flash Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera has an LED flash for low light c onditions. The following flash modes are available: Autom atic () , On/ forced () , a n d Of f () . Select Options > Image setup > Flash > On /for ced to use the flash. If the flash is set to Off or Automatic during bright conditions, the flash still emits a low light when an image is captured. This allows the subject of the picture to see when the picture is taken. Ther e is no flash effect on the resultant picture . Adjust still image camera settings There are two kinds of settings for the still image camera: Image setup settings and main settings. To adjust Imag e setup settings, see â Adjust color and lighting âÂÂ, p. 23 . The setup setting s return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To change the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Image quality â High - Print , Med. - E-mail , or Low - Multimedia . The better the image quality, the mo re memory the image consumes. The quality of a zoomed picture is lower than that of a non-zoomed picture. If you want to print the image, select High - Print (resolution 1600x1200). If you wa nt to send it through e-mail, select Med. - E-mail (resolution 1024x768). To send the image through MMS, select Low - Mult imedia (resolution 640x480).
Camera and Gallery 23 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Glossary: Resolution is a measure of sharpness and clarity of an image. Resolu tion refers to the number of pixels in an image. The more pix els, the more detailed the picture is, and the more memory it consumes . Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to save the image to a certain album in the gallery. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. Extended zoom âÂÂSelect On if you want to achieve maximum zoom but are prepared to accept lower im age resolution. Show captured image âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to see the captured image after it is taken, or No if you wa nt to continue taking pictures immediately. Default image name âÂÂSet a default name for the images you are going to take. You can repla c e the date with your own text (for example, âÂÂHoliday_2006âÂÂ). Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your images. Adjust color and lighting To enable the camera to re produce colors and lighting more accurately, or to add effects to your pictures or videos, select Options > Image setu p or Vid eo setup , and select from the following options: Shooting mode âÂÂSelect a mode for the environment in which you are taking pictur es. See â Shooting modes âÂÂ, p. 23 . Every mode uses its own lighting settings that have been adjusted according to a certain kind of environment. Flash (i mages and camera only)âÂÂSet the flash to Automati c , On/forced , or Off . See â The fla sh âÂÂ, p. 22 . White balance âÂÂSelect the current ligh ting condition from the list. This allows the came ra to reproduce colors mo re accurately. Colour tone âÂÂSelect a color effect from the list. The display changes to match any settings made, showing you how the change affects the pictures or videos. The settings return to the default settings when you close the camera. If you select a new mode, the settings are replaced by the settings of the selected mode. See â Shooting modes âÂÂ, p. 23 . If y ou need to change the setup settings, you can change th em after selecting a mode. Shooting modes Shooting modes help you to find the right color and lighting settings for the current environment. Select a mode for taking pictures or recording video clips from a modes list. The settings of each mode have been set according to a certain style or environment in which the
Camera and Gallery 24 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. pictures are taken. Select Options > Image setup / Video setup > Shooting mode : Video mode s Normal ( ) (default)âÂÂUse this mode in all conditions. Night ( )âÂÂUse this mode in low light conditions. Image modes Automati c ( ) (default)âÂÂUse this mode in all conditions. User define d ( ) â U s e t h i s m o d e t o create a personalized scene with your own flash, wh ite balance, and color tone settings. Portrait ( )âÂÂUse this mode to take portrait pictures, such as head shots and sitting poses. Landscape ( ) â U s e t h i s m o d e w h e n y o u t a k e p i c t u r e s o f objects that are further away. Night ( )âÂÂUse this mode in low light conditions. Sport ( )âÂÂUse this mode to take pict ures of fast moving objects. When you use this mode, the resolution of the images is reduced from 1600x1200 to 800x600. See Image quality , p. 22 . When taking pictures, the default mode is Automatic . If you selec t the User def ined m o d e , h o w e v e r , i t i s s e t a s t h e default mode. To make your own mode suita ble for a cert ain environment, select Us er define d mode. In the user mode you can adjust Based on mode , Flash , White balance, Colour tone , and Reset user mode options. To copy the settings of another mode, select Based on mode and the desired mode. Edit images To edit the pictures after taking them, or the ones already saved in Gallery , select Options > Edit . Select Apply effect to crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, color, contrast, compressi on, and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the picture. To crop a n image , select Options > Apply effect > Crop . Select Manual to crop the image size manually, or select a predefined aspect ratio from the list. If you select Manual , a cross appears on the upper le ft corner of the image. To move the cross, and select the area to be cropped, move the scroll key. Select Set . Another c ross appears on the lower right corner. Select again the area to be cropped, and select Crop . To add clip art to an image, select Options > Apply effect > Clip-art . Select the item y ou want to add from the list, and press . To move, rotate, a nd change the size of the item, select Options > Move , Resi ze , or Rotate .
Camera and Gallery 25 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To add text to an image, select Options > Apply effect > Text . Enter the text , and select OK . To edit the text, select Option s > Move , Resize , Rota te , or Select colour . Shortcuts in the image editor: ⢠To view an im age in the full screen mode, press . To return to the normal v iew, press again. ⢠To zoom in or out, press and . Record videos To move between still image and video capture, select Option s > Image mode or Video mode . Open the Video mode . To make lighting and color adjustments before recording a video, select Option s > Video setup > Shooting mode , White balance , or Colour tone . See â Adjust color and lighting âÂÂ, p. 23 . To select a mode, select Options > Video setup > Shooting mode . See â Shooting modes âÂÂ, p. 23 . 1 Press to start reco rding. The record icon is shown. The LED flash is lit, and a tone sounds, indicating to the subject that video is being recorded. There is no flash effect on the resultant video. 2 To pause recording at any time, select Pause . The pause icon ( ) blinks on the display. Video recording automatically stops if reco rding is set to pause and there are no key pr esses within a minute. 3 Sele ct Cont inue to resume recording. 4 Sele ct Stop to stop recording. The vi deo clip is automatically saved to the Images & video folder of Gallery . See â Gallery âÂÂ, p. 29 . Video recorder indicators show the following: ⢠The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators (1) show where the v ideo is sav ed. ⢠The current video length indicator (2 ) shows elapsed time and time remainin g. ⢠The mode indicat or (3) shows the active mode. See â Shooting modes âÂÂ, p. 23 . ⢠The microphone indicator (4) shows that the microphone is muted. ⢠The video quality indicator (5) shows the selected video quality. After a video clip is recorded: ⢠To immediately play the video clip you just recorded, select Option s > Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, press . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to record a new video, pres s .
Camera and Gallery 26 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠To send the video, press and select Via multimedia , Via e-m ail , or Via Bluetooth . For more information, see â Messaging âÂÂ, p. 40 and â Bluetooth connect ivity âÂÂ, p. 74 . This option is not avai lable during an active call. ⢠To send a video cli p to the other party during an active call, select Option s > Send to caller . ⢠To edit the video, select Options > Edit . See â Edit video clips âÂÂ, p. 27 . Video settings There are two kinds of settings for the video recorder: Video se tup setting s and main settings. To adjust Video setup settings, see â Adjust color and lighting âÂÂ, p. 23 . The setup settings return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To change the main settings, select Op tions > Settings and from th e following: Audio recording âÂÂSelect On if you want to record both image and sound. Video quali ty âÂÂSet the quality of the video clip to High , Normal , or Sharing . If you select High or Normal , the length of the video recording is restricted by the available space on your memory card, and up to 1 hour per clip. If you want to view the vid eo on a co mpatible TV or PC, select High video quality, which ha s CIF resolution (352x288) and file format .mp4. You cannot send video clips saved in the .mp4 f ormat in a multimedia message. If you want to view the clip in mobile phones, select Normal , which has QCIF resolution (176x144) and .3gpp file form at. To send the video clip throug h MMS, sele ct Sharing (QCIF resolution, .3gpp file format). The Normal video clip is limited to 300 KB (approximately 20 seconds in du ration) so that it can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Some networks, however, may only support sending of multimedia messages with a maximum size of 100 KB. Contact your service provider or network o perator for more informa tion. Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to save the recorded video clip to a certain a lbum in Gallery . Select Yes to open a list of available albums. Show captured video âÂÂSelect whether you want the recorded video clip to play automatically after the recording stops. Default v ideo name âÂÂDefine a name or select the date. Memory i n use âÂÂDefine the defau lt memory store: device memory or memory card.
Camera and Gallery 27 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Edit video clips You can edit video clips in Gallery . To edit video clips and create custom video clips, sc roll to a video clip, and select Options > Edit . To cr eate custom video clips, combine and trim video clips, and add images, sound cli ps, transi tions, and e ffects. Transiti ons are vis ual effects that you can add in the beginning and end of the video or between the video clips. In the video editor you can see two timelines: video clip timeline and sound clip timeline. If you add images , text, or transitions to a video clip , they are shown on the video clip timeline. To move on the ti meline s, scroll left or ri ght. To switch between the timelines, scroll up or down. Edit video, sound, i mage, text, and tra nsitions To create custom video clips, mark and select one or more video clips, and select Option s > Edit . Press and to move between the video clip and t he sound clip. To modify the video, select from the following options: Edit video clip : Cut âÂÂTrims the video clip in the cut video clip view. Add colour effect âÂÂInserts a color effect on the video clip. Use slow motion âÂÂSlows the speed of th e vid eo clip. Mute / Unmute âÂÂMutes or unmutes the original video clip sound. Move âÂÂMoves the video clip to the selected location. Remove âÂÂRemoves the video clip from the video. Duplicate âÂÂMakes a copy of the selected video clip. Edit text (shown only if you added text)âÂÂTo move, remove or duplicate text; change the color and style of the text; define how long it sta ys on the screen; and add ef fects to the text. Edit im age (shown only if you have added an image)âÂÂTo move, remove or duplicate an image; define how long it stays on the screen; and set a background or a color effect to the image. Edit sound cl ip : Cut âÂÂTrims the sound clip in the cut sound clip view. Move âÂÂMoves the sound clip to the selected location. Remove âÂÂRemoves the sound clip from the video. Duplicate âÂÂMakes a copy of the selected sound clip. Set duration âÂÂChanges the length of the sound clip.
Camera and Gallery 28 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Edit transition âÂÂThere are three types of transitions: at the start of a video, at the end of a vi deo, and trans itions between video clips. A start transition can be selected when the first transition of the video is active. Insert : Video cl ip âÂÂInserts the selected video clip. A thumbnail of the video clip is shown in the main view. A thumbnail consists of the first non-bla ck view of the video clip. The name and length of the se l ected video clip is also shown. Image âÂÂInserts the selected image. A thumbnail of th e image is shown in the main view. Text âÂÂInserts text to the video clip. You can insert a title, subtitle, or credits. Sound clip âÂÂInser ts the selected sound clip. The name and length of the selected sound clip is shown in the main view. New sound clip âÂÂRecords a ne w sound c lip to the sele cted location. Movie âÂÂPr eview the movie in the fu ll screen mode or as a thumbnail, sa ve or send the movie, or cut the movie to a proper size for sending it in a multimedia message. Tip! To take a snapshot of a video clip, select Options > Take snapshot in the thumbnail preview view or in the cut video view. To save your video, select Opti ons > Movie > Save . To define the Memory in use , select Options > Setti ngs . The default is the device memory. Tip! In the Settings view, you can define Default video name , Default image name , Resolution , and Memory in u se . Select Send > Via multi media , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth if you wa nt to send the video. Contact your service provider or netwo rk operator for details of the maximum multimedia message size th at you can send. If your video is too large to be sent in a multimedia message, appears. Tip! If you want to send a video clip that is over the maximum multimedia message size allowed by your service provider, you can send the clip using Bluetooth connectivity. See â Send data using Bluetooth connectivity âÂÂ, p. 75 . You can also tra nsfer your videos to your PC using Bluetooth wireless technology or by using a memory card reader (enhancement).
Camera and Gallery 29 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Gallery To store and organize your images, video clips, sound clips, playlists, and streaming links, press , and select Gallery . To open the gallery from the Camera application, se lect Option s > Go to Gallery . In Cam era , o nly the Images & video folder is available. Tip! To switch fr om Gallery to the camera, select Options > Go to Camera from the Images & video folder. Select Images & video , Tracks , Sound cli ps , Links , or All files , and press to open it. You can browse and open folders; and mark, c opy, and move items to folders. V ideo clips, .ram files, and stream ing links are opened and played in the RealPlayer application. See â RealPlayer âÂÂ, p. 36 . Music tracks are played and managed in the music player application. See â Music player âÂÂ, p. 68 . Tip! You can transfer images from your device to a compatible PC with Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite. See the C D-ROM supplied with your device. To copy or move files to a compatible memor y card or to device memory, select a file and Options > Organ ise > Copy to memory card / Move to memory card or Copy to phone mem. / Move to phone mem. . Files stored on the memory card are indicated with . To download files into Gallery in one of the main folders using the browser, select Graphic downls. , or Video downlds. , Track downlds. , or Sound downl ds. . T he browser opens, and you can se lec t a bookmark from which the site can download. View images and video clips Pictures taken and video clip s recorded with the camera are stored in the Images & vide o folder in Gallery . The quality of a video clip is indicated with one of the following icons: (High), (Normal), and (Sharing). Images and video c lips can also be sent to y ou in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through Bluetooth connectiv ity. To be able t o view a received image or video clip in the ga llery or in the media player, you must save it in the device memory or on a compatible memory card.
Camera and Gallery 30 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Open the Images & video folder in Gallery . The images and video clip files are in a loop, and ordered by date. The number of files can be seen on the display. To browse the files, scroll left or right. Pr ess and hold or to brow se the files in a continuous loop. To edit an image or a video clip, select Options > Edit . An image editor or a video editor opens. To save memory space after you print or upload your images, and still keep a small version of the image on your device, select Options > Shrink . To add an image or a video cl ip to an album in the gallery, select Op tions > Add to album . See â Albums âÂÂ, p. 30 . To create custom video clips, select a video clip, o r several clips in the gallery, and select Options > Edit . See â Edit video clips âÂÂ, p. 27 . To print your images on a printer connected to your device, or to store them on a compatible memory card for printing, select Op tions > Print . See â Image print âÂÂ, p. 35 . To zoom an image, select Options > Zoom in . The zooming ratio is at the top of the display. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To delete an image or video clip, press . Slide show Use Slide show to view images and video clips in the full screen mode. Select from the following: ⢠Start âÂÂto start the slide show. ⢠Play âÂÂto open the RealPlayer application. ⢠Pause âÂÂto pause the slide show. ⢠Continue âÂÂto r esume the slide show. ⢠End âÂÂto close the slide show. Press (faster) or (slower) to adjust the Tempo . Press (previous) or (next) to browse the thumbnails. To add sound to the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Music settin gs and from the following: ⢠Music âÂÂSelect On , or Off . ⢠Track âÂÂSelect a music file from the list. ⢠Volume âÂÂPress to decrease the volume, or to incr ease the volume. Albums With albums you ca n convenie ntly manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list, in the Images & video folder, select Options > Albums . The albums are ordered alphabetica lly. To view the content of an album, press .
Camera and Gallery 31 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To create a new al bum, select Options > New album . Enter a name for the albu m, and select OK . To add a picture or a video clip to an album in the gallery, scroll to a picture or video clip, and selec t Options > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or video clip, and press . To remove a file fr om an al bum, press . The fi le is not deleted from the Images & video folder in Galle ry . PrintOnline Note: The avail ability of this service may vary according to your countr y or sales ar ea, and the service may only be available in a limited number of languages. With the PrintOnline application you can print images online, and order different products with the selected image, such as mugs or mous e pads. The available products depend on the service provider. In order to use PrintOnline , you must subscribe to the service with an online printing service p rovider and have at least one printing service conf iguration file installed. The files can be obtained from prin ting service providers that support PrintOnline . You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. 1 Press , and select Gallery > Images & video . Select an imag e or images, and Option s > Print > Order prints . 2 Select a service provider from the list. 3 Sele ct Options and from the fol lowing: Open âÂÂto start the connection to the service provider. Remove âÂÂto remove the service provider from the list. If you remove the last servic e prov ider from the list, the Order prints option is not available until you have at least one configuration file installed. Log âÂÂto view the details of the previous orders: the name of the service provider, total sum, and status of the order. When you are connected to the service provider server, the images preview view opens, and displays the images you selected in Gallery . 4 Sele ct Options and from the fol lowing: Preview âÂÂto view the image before ordering a print. Scroll up or down to view the images. Order now âÂÂto submit your order. Change product order âÂÂto adjust the product details and number of copies for the selected image. In the product order view, you can select which product and of what type you want to order. The available opti ons and products vary depending on the service provider.
Camera and Gallery 32 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Scroll left or right to view and change the image details of the other images in the order. Change customer info âÂÂto change the customer and order information. You ca n copy the customer information from con t acts. Add image âÂÂto add more images to the order. Remove image âÂÂto remove images from the order. Log âÂÂto view the details of the previous orders. When the order is sent, Order sent succe ssfully is displayed. Online sharing Note: The availability of this service may vary according to your country or sales area, and the service may only be available in a limited number of languages. With the Onli ne sharing application, you can share your images and videos in online al bums, weblogs, or in other online sharing services on the Web. You can upload content, save unfini shed posts a s drafts and co ntinue later, and view the content of the albums. The supported content types may vary depending on the service provider. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Get starte d To use Online sharing , you must subscribe to the service with an online image sharing service pr ovider. You can usually subscribe to the service on the Web page of the service provider. Contact your service provider for details on subscribing to t he service. For more informati on on compatible service providers, see www.nokia-asia.com/ When you open the service for the firs t time in the Online sharing application, you are prompted to provide the user name and password. You can access the settings later throug h Options > Settings in the Online sharing application. See â Online sharing settings âÂÂ, p. 33 . Upload files Press , and select Gallery > Images & vide o , the files you want to upload, and Options > Send > Web upload . You can access the Online sharing application also from the main camera. The Select service view opens. To cr eate a new account to a service, select Options > Add new account or the service icon with the text Create new in the services list. If you have created a new acc ount offline, or modified an account or service settings through a Web browser on a compatible PC, to update the services list in your device, select Options > Retrieve services . To select a service, press the scroll key. N72/support.
Camera and Gallery 33 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. When you select the service, the selected images and videos are shown in the edit state. You can open and view the files, reorganize them, add text to them, or add new files. To cancel the Web upload process, and save the created post as a draft, select Back > Save as draft . If the uploading has already started, selec t Cancel > Save as draft . To connect to the service and upload the files to the Web, select Options > Upload , or press . Open online se rvice To view uploaded images and videos in the online service, and draft and sent en tries in your device, in the Images & video folder, select Options > Online Se rvices . If you have created a new account offline, or modified an account or service settings through a Web browser on a compatible PC, to update the services list in your device, select Option s > Retrieve services . Select a serv ice from t he list. After you open a s ervice, select fro m the following: ⢠Open in Web browser âÂÂto connect to the selected service and view the upload ed and draft albums in the Web browser. The view may vary depending on the service provider. ⢠Drafts âÂÂto view and edit th e draft entries, and u pload them to the Web. ⢠Sent âÂÂto view the 20 latest entries created through your device. ⢠New post âÂÂto create a new entry. The available options may vary depend ing on the service provi der. Online sharing settings To edit the Online sharing settings, in the Online sharing application, select Options > Settin gs . My accounts In My accounts , you can create new accounts or edit existing accounts. To crea te a new account, select Opti ons > Add new account . To edit an existin g account, select an account and Options > Edit . Select from the following: Account name âÂÂto enter a name for the account. Service prov ider âÂÂto select the service provider you want to use. You cannot change the service provider for an existing account, you must create a new account for the new service provider. If you delete an a ccount in My accoun ts , the services related to the account are also deleted from you device, including the sent items for the service. User name and Password âÂÂto enter the user name and password you created for your account when you registered to the online service.
Camera and Gallery 34 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Upload image size âÂÂto sele ct the size in which the im ages are uploaded to the service. Application settings Display image size âÂÂto select the size in which the image is shown on the display of yo ur device. This setting does not affect the upload image size. Display text size âÂÂto select the font size used to display text in draft and sent entries, or when you add or edit text to a new entry. Advanced Service providers âÂÂto view or edit service provider settings, add a new service provider, or view details of a service provider. If you change the service provider, all the My accounts information for the previous service provider is lost. You cannot change the settin g s of predefined service providers. Default access point âÂÂto change the access point used to connect to the online service, select the access point you want.
Imaging 35 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging Image print To print images with Image print , select the print option in the gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image pr int to p rint your images using a compatible USB data cable, Bluetooth connectivity, or a compatible memory card. You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. The pictures taken with the camera are automatically saved in .jpg format. To print to a PictBridge-compli a nt printer, select the print option before you connect the USB cable. Select the image you want to print and Options > Print . Printer selection When you use Image pri nt for the first time, a list of available printers is displaye d after you select the image. Select a printer you want to use. The printer is set as the default printer. If you have connected a p rinter compatible with P ictBridge using a co mpatib le data cab le, for ins tance the Nokia Connectivity cab le CA-53, th e printer is automatically disp laye d. If the default printer is not available, a list of av ailable printing devices is displayed. Print preview The print preview view opens only when you start printing an image in the gallery or the active standby mode. The images that you selected are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scr oll left and right through the available layouts for the selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, scroll up or down to display the additional pages. Print settings The available options vary, depe nding on the capab ilities of the printing device you selected. To select the paper size, select Pape r size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cance l to return to the previous view.
Imaging 36 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. RealPlayer Press , and select Imaging > RealPlaye r . With RealPlayer , you can play video clips, sound clips, and playlists, or stream media files over the air. You can activate a streaming link when y ou browse Web pages, or store it in the device memory or a compatible memory card. RealPlayer supports files with extensions such as .aac, .awb, .m4a, .mid, .mp3, and .wav. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support al l file formats or all the variations of file formats. For example, RealPlayer attempts to open all .mp4 f iles, but some .mp4 files may include content that is not compliant with 3GPP standards and, therefore, is not supported by this device. Tip! You can transfer music file s from your device to a compatible memory ca rd with Nokia Audio Manager available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Play video or sound clips 1 To play a media file stored in device memory, or on a compatible memory card, select Options > Open and from the fo llowing: Most recent clips âÂÂto play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer . Saved clip âÂÂto play a file saved in Gallery . See â Gallery âÂÂ, p. 29 . 2 Scroll to a file, and press to play the file. Tip! To view a video clip in full screen mode, press . Press again to change back to normal screen mode. Icons in RealPlayer : âÂÂRepeat; âÂÂRandom; â Repeat and random; and âÂÂLoudspeaker muted. Create a track list To create a track list of the music tracks on your device memory or a compatible me mory card: 1 Select Options > New track list . 2 Select the memory from which you want to select the music tracks. 3 Enter a name for the track list. 4 Select the music tracks you want to include in the track list. 5 Select Back . The track list automatically st arts to play. Tip! To leave the application open and play music in the background, press twice to return to the standby mode. To return to the application, press , and select RealPlayer .
Imaging 37 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Shortcuts during play: ⢠To fast forward, press and hold . ⢠To rewind through the media file, press and hold . ⢠To mute the sound, press and hold until is displayed. To turn on the so und, press and hold until you see . Stream content over the air Many service providers require you to use an Internet access point (IAP) for your default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. The access points may be conf ig ured when you first start your device. Contact you r serv ice provide r for mo re info rmation. Note: In RealPlayer , you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer will rec ognise an http link to a .ram file. To stream content over the air, select a streaming link saved in Gallery , on a Web page, o r received in a text message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loa ding the co ntent. Th e conten t is not sav ed in the device. Receive RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a special text message from the network operator or service provider. See â Data and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . For more information , contact your network opera tor or service provider. Change the RealPlayer settings Sele ct Options > Se ttings and from the following: Video âÂÂto have Real Player automatical ly repeat video clips after they fi nish playing. Audio settings âÂÂto select if you want to repeat playing of track lists and play sound clip s on a track list in random order. Connec tion settin gs âÂÂto select whether to use a proxy server, change the default access point, and set the time-outs and port range used when connecting. Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Proxy settings : Use proxy âÂÂTo use a proxy server, select Yes . Proxy serv. address âÂÂEnter the IP address of the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the port number of the proxy server.
Imaging 38 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Glossary : Proxy servers are intermediate servers between media servers and their users. Some service providers use them to provide additio nal security or speed up access to browser pa ges that contain sound or video clips. Network se ttings : Default access poin t âÂÂScrol l to the acce ss poin t you wa nt to use to connect to the Internet, and press . Online t ime âÂÂSet the time for RealPlayer to discon nect from the network when you pause a media clip playing through a network link, select Us er defined , and press . Enter the time, and select OK . Lowest UDP port âÂÂEnter the lowest port number of the servers port range. The minimum value is 697 0. Highest UDP port âÂÂEnter the highest port number of the servers port range. The maximum value is 32000. Select Options > Advance d settings to edit the bandwidth values for different networ ks. Movie director To create muvees, press , and select Imaging > Movie . Muvees are short, edited video clips that can contain video, images, music, and text. Quick muvee is created automatically by Movie director after you select the style for the muvee. Movie dir ecto r uses the default music and text associated with the chos en style. Every style has its own font style, color, music, and pace. In a Custom muvee you can select your own video and music clips, images and style, and add an op ening and closing message. You can send muvees in a multimedia message. Open Movie , and press or to move between the and views. You can also return to the main view from the view by selecting Done . The view contains a list of video clips that you can Play , Se nd , Rename , and Delete . Create a quick muvee 1 In the Movie main view, select Quick muvee . 2 Select a style for the muvee from the style list. The created muvee is saved in the Movie dir e ctor muvee list. The muvee is played automatically after saving. Tip! To download new styles to your device, select Style downlds. (network service) fr om the Movie director main vie w. Create a custom muvee 1 In the Movie main view, select Custom muvee . 2 Select the clips you want to include in your muvee in Video , Image , Style , or Music .
Imaging 39 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. After you select video c lips and images, to define the order in which the files are pl ayed in the muvee, select Option s > Advanced options . To select the file you want to move, press the scroll key. Then scroll to the file below which you want to pl ace the marked file, an d press the scroll key. To cut the video clips, select Options > Select contents . See â Select content âÂÂ, p. 39 . In Message you can add an opening and closing text to a muvee. 3 Select Create muvee and from the following: Multimedia message âÂÂto optimize the le ngth of the muvee for MMS sending. Auto-sel ect âÂÂto include all the selected pictures and video clips in the muvee. Same as music âÂÂto set the muvee duration to be the same as the chosen music clip. User defined â to define the length of the muvee. 4 Select Options > Save . To preview the custom muvee before saving it, in the Preview muvee view, select Options > Play . To create a ne w custom muvee by using the same style settings, selec t Options > Recreate . Select content After you select images and video clips for your muvee, you can edit the selected video clips. Select Options > Advanced options > Op tions > Select contents . You can select which parts of the video clip you want to include or exclude in the muvee. A slider below the video screen indicates the included, exclu ded, and neutralized parts with colors: green is for included, red is for excluded, and grey is for neutral parts. To include a part of the video clip in the muvee, scroll to the part, and select Options > Include . To exclude a part from the video clip, scroll to the part, and select Option s > Exclude . To let Movie director randomly include or exclude a part of the video clip, scroll to the part, and select Option s > Mark as neutral . To exclude a shot from the video clip, select Options > Exclude shot . To let Movie director randomly include or exclude parts of the video clip, select Options > Mark all as neutral . Settings Sele ct Settings to edit the following options: Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your muvees. Resolution âÂÂSelect the r esolution of your muvees. Default muvee name âÂÂSet a default name for the muvees.
Messaging 40 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging Press , and select Messaging . In Messagin g , you can create, send, receive, view, edit, and organ ise text messages, multimedia mess ages, e-mail messages, and special text messages cont aining data. You can also receive messages and da ta through B luetooth connectiv ity, receiv e Web serv ice messages, cell broadcast messages, and send service comma nds. Note: Only devices that have compatible features can rece ive and dis p lay mult imedia messa ges. The appearance of a message may vary de pending on the receiving device. When you open Messagin g , you can see the New message function and a list of folders: Inbox âÂÂContain s received messa ges except e-mail and cell broadc ast messag es. E-ma il messag es are stored in the Mailbox . My folders âÂÂFor organising your messages into folders. Mailbox âÂÂIn Mailbox you can connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messa ges or view your p reviously retrie ved e-mail messages offline. See â E-mai l âÂÂ, p. 53 . Drafts âÂÂStores draft messages that have not been sent. Sent âÂÂStores the last 20 messages that ha ve been sent excluding messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity. To change the number of messages to be saved, see â Other settings âÂÂ, p. 55 . Outbox âÂÂA temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Reports âÂÂYou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service ). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message tha t has been sent to an e-mail address mi ght not be possible. Tip! When you have opened any of the default folders, you can switch between the folders by pressing or . To enter and send service requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network services, to your service provid er, select Options > Service command in the main view of Messaging .
Messaging 41 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receiv e messages on various topics, su ch as weather or traf fic conditions from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, co ntact your service provider. In the main view of Messaging , select Option s > Cell broadcast . In the main view you can see the status of a topic, a topic number, name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-u p. Write text Traditional text input , , and indicate the selected charac ter mode. indicates number mode. is displa yed when you are writing text using traditional text input. ⢠Press a number key ( â ) repeatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key than are printed on the key. ⢠To insert a number, press and hold the number key. ⢠To switch between letter an d number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait un til the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period), and enter the letter. ⢠To erase a character, press . Press and hold to clear more than one character. ⢠T he most common punctuat ion mark s are available under . Press repeatedly to reach the desired punctua tion mar k. Press to open a list of special characters . Use to move th rough the list, an d select a character. ⢠To insert a space, press . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠T o switch between the different character modes, pres s . Predictive text inputâÂÂdictionary You can enter any letter with a si ngle keypress. Predictive text input is based on a built -in dictionary to which you can also add new words. When the dictionary becomes full, the latest added word replaces the oldest. 1 To activate predictive text input, press , and select Dictionary on . This activates predictive text input for all editors in the device. is displayed when you write text using predictive text input.
Messaging 42 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 To write the desired word, press the keys ( â ). Press each key only once for one letter. For example, to write "Nokia" when the English dictionary is selected, press for N, for o, for k, for i, and for a. The word suggestion changes after each keypress. 3 When you finish writing the wo rd and it is correct, to confirm it, press , or press to add a space. If the word is not correct, press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionar y has found one by one, or press , and select Dictionary > Matches . If the ? character is shown after the word, t he word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, select Spell , enter the word using traditional text input, and select OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 4 Start writing the next word. Tip! To set predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly. Tips on predictive text input To erase a c haracter, press . Press an d hold to c lear more th an one char acter. To change between the different character modes, press . If you press quickly twice, predic tive text input is turned off. Tip! Predictive text input tries to guess which commonly used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is needed. The order and availability of the punctuation marks depend on the language of the dictionary. To insert a number in letter mode, press and hold the desired number key. To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . The most common punctuation marks are available under . Press and then repeatedly to search for the desired punctuation mark. Press and hold to open a list of special c haracters. Press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one. Press , select Dictionary , and press to select one of the following options: Matches âÂÂView a list of words that correspond to your key presses. Insert word âÂÂAdd a word to the dictionary by using traditional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. Edit word âÂÂEdit the word using traditional text input. This is availabl e if the word is active (underlined).
Messaging 43 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tip! When you press , the following options appear (depending on the editing mode): Dictionary (predictive text input), Alpha mode (traditional text input), Number mode , Cut (if text has been selected), Copy (if text has been selected), Paste (when text has been cut or copied first), Inser t number , Insert symbol , and Writing language: (changes the input language for all editors in the device). Write compound word s Write the first half of a co mpound word; to confirm it, press . Wri te the last part of the compound word. To complete the compound word, press to add a space. Turn predictive text input off Press , and select Dictionary > Off to turn predictive text input off for all edito rs in the device. Copy text to clipboard 1 To select letters and words, press and hold . At the same time, press or . As the selection moves, text is highlighted. 2 To copy the text to the clipboard, while still holding , select Copy . 3 To insert the text into a document, press and hold , and select Paste ; or press once, and select Paste . To select lines of text, press and hold . At the same time, press or . To remove the selected text from the document, pres s . Write and send messages The appearance of a multimedia message may vary, depend ing on the receivi ng device. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Tip! You can start to create a message from a ny application that has the option Send . Select a file (image or text) to be added to the message, and select Options > Send . Before you can create a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the co rrect connection settings in place. See â Receive MMS and e-mail settings âÂÂ, p. 45 and â E-mail âÂÂ, p. 53. The wireless network may li mit the siz e of MMS messages. If the inserted picture ex ceed s this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS.
Messaging 44 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1 Select New message . A list of message options opens. Text message âÂÂto send a text message. Multimedia message âÂÂto send a multimedia message (MMS). E-mail âÂÂto send an e- mail. If you have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. 2 Press to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. Press to add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients. You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. Tip! Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. You can mark several recipients at a time. 3 Press to move to the message field. 4 Write the message. 5 To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert object > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . When sound is added, is shown. You cannot send video clips that are save d in the .mp4 format in a multimedia m essage. To ch ange the form at in which recorded videos are saved, see â Video settings âÂÂ, p. 26 . 6 To take a new picture or record sound or video for a multimedia message, select Options > In sert new > Image , Sound clip , or Video c lip . To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide . Select Options > Preview to see what the multimedia message look s like. 7 To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , or Not e . E-mail attachments are indicated b y in the navigation bar. Tip! To send files other than sounds and notes as attachments, open the appropriate application, and select Options > Send > Via e-mail , if available. 8 To send the message, select Options > Send , or press .
Messaging 45 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your device supports the sendin g of text messages beyond the character limit for a single message. Lon g er messages are sent as a series of two or more messages. Your serv ice provider may cha rge accordingl y. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options like Chinese, take up more space limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. In the navigation ba r, you can see the message length indicator counting backwards. For example, 10 (2) means that you can still add 10 characters for the text to be sent as two messages. Note: E-m a il messages are automatically placed in Outbox before sending. If sending does not succeed, the e-mail is left in the Outbox with the Failed status. Tip! In Messaging you can also create presentations and send them in a multimedia message. In the multimedia message editor view, select Options > Create p resen tation (shown only if MMS creati on mode is set to Guided or Free ). See â Multimedi a messages âÂÂ, p. 52 . Tip! When you send a multimedia messag e to an e-mail address or a devi ce that supports the receiving of large images, use the larger image size. If you are not sure of the receiving device, or the network does not support sending large files, it is recommended that you use a smaller image size or a sound clip that is no longer than 15 seconds. To change the setting, select Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Image si ze in the Messaging main view. Receive MMS and e-mail settings You may receive the settings in a text message from your network operator or service provider. See â Data and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . For availability of and subscr iption to data services, contact your network opera tor or service provider. Follow the instructions given by your s ervice provider. Enter the M MS settings manu ally: 1 Sele ct Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Access points , and define the settings for a multimedia mess aging access point. See â Connection settings âÂÂ, p. 87 . 2 Sele ct Messa ging > Options > Settings > Multimedia messag e > Access point in use and the ac cess point you created to be used as the preferred connection. See al so â Multimedia messages âÂÂ, p. 52 .
Messaging 46 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Before you can send, r eceive, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, you must do the following: ⢠Configure an Internet access point (IAP) correctly. See â Connection settings âÂÂ, p. 87 . ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly. See â E-mail âÂÂ, p. 53 . You need to have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions g iven by yo ur remote mailbox and Internet service prov ider (ISP). InboxâÂÂreceive messages Inbox icons: âÂÂunread messages in Inb ox ; â unread text message; âÂÂunread mu ltimedia message; âÂÂdata received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new message are shown in the standby mode. Select Show to open the message. To open a message in Inbox , sc roll to it , and press . Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may contain malicious software or otherwise be har mful to your devic e or PC. You may receive a notification that you have received a multimedia message that is saved in the multimedia message centre. To start a pa cket data connection to retrieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a mess age, and simultan eously listen to a sound through the loudspeake r ( is shown if sound is included). Click the arrow in the icon to listen to the sound. To see what kind s of media obj ects have been included in the multimedia message, open the message, and select Options > Obj ects . You can choose to save a multimedia object file in your device or send it, for example, through Bluetooth connectivity t o another co mpatible device. To view received multimed ia presentations, select Options > Play presentation . Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Data and settings Your device can receive many kinds of text messages that contain data ( ), also called ove r-the-air (OTA) messages:
Messaging 47 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Configur ation message âÂÂYou may receive a text message service number, voice mailbox number , Internet access point settings, access point l ogin script settings, or e-mail settings from your network ope rator, service provider, or company information management departmen t in a configuration message. To save the settings, select Option s > Save all . Busines s card âÂÂTo save the information to Contacts , select Option s > Save bus iness card . Certificates or sound files attached to the business card are not saved. Ringin g to ne âÂÂTo save the ri nging tone, selec t Opt ions > Save . Operator logo âÂÂFor the logo to be shown in the standby mode instead of the network operatorâÂÂs own identification, select Options > Save . Calendar entry âÂÂTo save the invitation, select Options > Save to Calendar . Web message âÂÂTo save the bookmark to the bookmarks list in Web, select Options > Add to bo okm arks . If the message contains both access point settings and bookmarks, to save the data, select Options > Save al l . E-mail noti fication âÂÂTel ls you how many ne w e-mail s you have in your remote mailbox. An extended notification may list more detailed information. Tip! If you receive a vCa rd file that has a picture attached, the picture is saved to contacts. Web service messages Web service mess ages ( ) are notifications (for example, news headlines) and may contai n a text message or a link. For availability and subscription, contact your service provi der. My folders In My folders , you can organise your messages into folders, create new folders, and rename and delete folders. Tip! You can use texts in the templates folder to avoid rewriting messages that you send often. Mailbox If you select Mailbox and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. See â E-mail âÂÂ, p. 53 . When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes.
Messaging 48 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Open the mailbox When you open the mailbox, you can choose wheth er you want to view the previously retrieved e-mail messages and e-mail headings offline or co nnect to the e-mail server . When you scroll to y our mailbox, and press , the device asks you if you want to Conne ct to mailbox? . Select Yes to connect to your mailbox, and retr ieve new e-mail headings or messages . When you view mess ages online, you are continuously connected to a re mote mailbox using a packet data connection. See also â Connection settings âÂÂ, p. 87. Select No to view previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. When you view e -mail messages offline, your device is not connected to the remote mailbox. Retrieve e-mail messages If you are offline, select Option s > Con nect to st art a connection to a remote mailbox. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious softwar e or otherwise be harmful to you r device or PC. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail . New âÂÂto retrieve all new e-mail messages to your device. Selected âÂÂto retrieve only the e-mail messages that have been marked. All âÂÂto retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving mess ages, select Cancel . 2 After you retrieve the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online, or select Options > Disconnect to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline. E-mail status icons: New e-mail (offline or online mode): the content has not been retrieved to your device. New e-mail: the content has been retrieved to your device. The e-mail message has been read. The e-mail heading has been read and the message content has been deleted from the device. 3 To open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrieved (arr ow in the icon is pointing outwards) and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve t his message from the mailbox.
Messaging 49 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To view e-mail attachments, open a message that h as the attach ment indicator , and s elect Opti ons > Attachments . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the device; select Options > Retrie ve . In the Attachment s view, you can ret rieve, open, save, or remove attachments. You can also send attachments using Blu etooth connectivity. Tip! If your mailbox uses the IMAP4 protocol, you can define how many messages to retrieve, and whether to retrieve the attachments. See â E-mail âÂÂ, p. 53 . With the POP3 prot ocol, the options are Headers only , Partially (kB) , or Msgs. & attachs. . Retrieve e-mail messages auto matically To retrieve messages automatically, select Options > E-mail settings > Au tomatic retrieval > Header retrieval . Select Always on or Only in home net. , and define when, and how often, the messages are retr ieved. Retrieving e-mail messages automatically may incre a se your call costs due to the data traffic. Delete e-mail messages To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remo te mailbox, select Option s > Delete . In Delete msg. fr om: , select Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your de vice. If you want to remove the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, and then make a connection from your device to th e remote mailbox again to update the status. Tip! To copy an e-mail from the remote mailbox to a folder under My fol ders , select Options > Copy to folder , a folder from the list, and OK . To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Option s > Delete . In Delete msg. from: , select Phone and ser ver . If you are offline, the e-mail is deleted first from your device. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it is automatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only after you have closed the connection to the remote mailbox. To cancel deleting an e-mail from the device and serve r, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Options > Undelete .
Messaging 50 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, select Options > Disconnect to end the packet data connection to the remote mailbox . Tip! If you leave your mailbox connection open, the new e-mail ( Headers on ly as defau lt) is retrieved from the remote mailbox to your device automatically (only if th e IMAP IDLE function is supported by your server). To leave the messaging application open in the background, press twice. Leaving the connection open may increas e your call costs due to the data traffic. View e-mail messages when offli ne When you open Mailbox the next time and you want to view and read th e e-mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? qu ery. You can read the previously retrieved e-mail headings, the retrieved e-mail messages, or both. You can al so write new, reply to, or forward e-mail to be sent the next time you connect to the mailbox. OutboxâÂÂmessages waiting to be sent Outbox is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Status of the messages in Outbox : Sending âÂÂA connection is being made and the message is being sent. Waitin g / Queued â T h e m e s s a g e w i l l b e s e n t w h e n p r e v i o u s messages of a similar type have been sent. Resend at (time)âÂÂThe device will try to send the message again after a time -out period. Select Options > Send to restart the sending immediately. Deferred âÂÂYou can set documents to be on hold while they are in Outbox . Scroll to a message that is being sent, and select Options > Defer send ing . Failed âÂÂThe maximum number of sending attempts has been reached. Sending has f ailed. If you were trying to send a text message, open the message, and check that the sending options are correct. Example: Messages are plac ed in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. You can also sc hedule e-mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox.
Messaging 51 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. View messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, you need to copy them to a folder in your device. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mark/Unmar k > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A l ist of folders opens. 4 Select a folder and OK to st art copying. Open the folder to view the messages. Messaging settings Text messages Select Messaging > Op tions > Settings > Text message . Message centres âÂÂLists all the text message centres that have been defined. Msg. c entre in use âÂÂSelect which message centre is used for delivering text messages. Receive report âÂÂTo request the network to send delivery reports on your messa ges (network service). W hen set to No , only the Sent status is shown in the log. See â LogâÂÂ, p. 14 . Message val idity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed from the text message centre. The network must support this fe ature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. Message sent as âÂÂChange this option on ly if you are sure that your message ce ntre is ab le to convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your network operator. Preferred conne ction âÂÂYou can send text messages through the normal GSM n etwork or through packet data, if supported by the network. See â Connection settings âÂÂ, p. 87 . Reply via same ctr. âÂÂSelect Yes , if you want the reply message to be sent usin g the same text message centre number (net work s ervice) . Add a new text m essage centre 1 Sele ct Message cent res > Options > New msg. centre . 2 Press , write a name for the message centre, and select OK . 3 Press and , and write the number of the text message centre. You receive the n u mber from your service provider. 4 Sele ct OK . 5 To use the new settings, go back to the settings view. Scroll to Msg. centre in use , and select the new message centre.
Messaging 52 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Multimedia messages Select Messaging > Options > Set tings > Multimedia messag e . Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia messag e. The options ar e Original (shown only when the MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free ), Small , and Large . Select Original to increase the size of the multimedia message. MMS creation mode âÂÂIf you select Gu ided , the device informs you if you try to send a messag e that m ay not be supported by the recipient. Select Restricted ; the device prevents you from sending messages that may not be supported. Access point in use ( Must be defined )âÂÂSelect which access point is used as the preferred connection for the multimedia message centre. Multimedia retrieval âÂÂSelect how you want to re ceive multimedia messages. To receive multimedia messages automatically in your home network, select Aut. in home network . Outside your home networ k, you recei ve a notification that you have re ceived a multimedia message that is saved in the multim edia message centre. You can select if you want to retrieve the message t o your device. When you are outside your home network, sending and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. If you select Multime dia re trieva l > Always automatic , your device automatically mak es an active packet data connection to retrieve the message both in and outside your home network. Allow anon. messages âÂÂSelect No if you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender. Receive adverts âÂÂDefine whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements. Receive report âÂÂSelect Yes if you want the status of th e sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to a n e-mail a ddress might not be possible. Deny report sending âÂÂSelect Yes if you do not want your device to send delivery repor ts of receiv ed multimed ia messages. Message validit y âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity period, the mess age is removed from the multimedia messagin g cent re. The network must support this feature. Maximum t ime is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. Tip! You may also obtain the multimedia and e-mail settings from your service provider throug h a configuration message. Contact your service provider for more in formation. See â Data and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 .
Messaging 53 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. E-mail Select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail , or in the mailbox main view, select Options > E-mail settings and from the following: Mailbo x in us e âÂÂSelect which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail. Mailboxes âÂÂOpens a list of mailboxes that have been defined. If no mailboxes have been defined, you are prompted to do so. Select a mailbox to change the following settings: Mailbox settings , User settings , and Automatic retrieval . Mailbox settings : Mailbox name âÂÂEnter a descriptive name for the mailbox. Access point in use ( M ust be defined )â Choose an Internet access point (IAP) for t he mailbox. See â Connection settings âÂÂ, p. 87. My e-mail ad dress ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Replies to your messages are sent to this address. Outgoing mail server ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e-mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your network operator. Contact your service provider for more info rmation. Send message âÂÂDefine how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immed iately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select When conn. avail. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. User name âÂÂEnter your user name, given to you by your service provider. Password: âÂÂEnter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for th e password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Mailbox type: âÂÂDefines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings. If you use the POP3 protocol, e-mail messages are not upda ted automatically in online mode. To see the latest e-mail messages, you must disconnect and make a new connection to y our mailbox. Security (por ts) âÂÂUsed with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to the remote mailbox.
Messaging 54 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. APOP secure lo gin (no t shown if IMAP4 is selected for Mailbox type )âÂÂUsed with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to th e remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. User settin gs : E-mails to retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂDefine how many new e-mails are retrieved to the mailbox. Retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set t o IMAP4)âÂÂDefine which parts of the e-mails are retrieved: Headers only , Parti ally (kB) , or Msgs. & attachs. . Retrieve attachments (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂChoose whether you want to retrieve e-mail with or without attachments. Subscribed folders (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂYou can subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those folders. Send copy to se lf âÂÂSelect Yes t o s a v e a c o p y o f t h e e - m a i l to your remot e mailbox and to the address defined in My e-mail address . Include signature âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. My name âÂÂEnter your own name here. Your name replaces your e-mail address in th e recipientâÂÂs phone when the recipientâÂÂs phone supports this function. Automatic retrie val : Header retrieval âÂÂWhen this function is on, messages are retrieved automatically. You can define when, and how often, the messages are retrieved. Activating Header retrieval may increase your ca ll cost s due to the data tr affic. Web service messages Select Messaging > Opt ions > Sett ings > Service message . Choose whether you want to receive service messages. If you want to set the device to automatically activate the browser and st art a network connection to retrieve con t ent when you receive a service message, select Download messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast Check the available topics and related topic numbers wi th your service provider, and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > Cell broadcast to change the settings. Reception âÂÂChoose whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages.
Messaging 55 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Language â All allows you to receive cell broadc ast messages in all supported languages. Selected allows you to choose in which languages you wish to receive cell broadcast messages. If you cannot find the desired language, select Other . Topic detection âÂÂIf you set Topic detection > On , the device automatical ly searches for new topi c numbers, and saves the new numbers without a name to the topic list. Select Off if you do not want to save new topic numbers automatically. Other settings Select Messaging > Op tions > Settings > Other . Save sent messages âÂÂChoose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you send to the Sent folder. No. of saved msgs. âÂÂDefine how many sent messages are saved to the Sent folder at a time. The default limit is 20 messages. When the limit is re ached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use âÂÂChoose the memory where you want to save your messages: Phone memory or Memory card . New e-mail al erts âÂÂChoose whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications, a tone or a note, when new mail is received t o the mailbox.
Radio 56 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Radio Press , and select Radio . You can use the application as a traditional FM radio with automatic tuning and saved stations, or wi th parallel v isu al information related to the radio program on the display, if you tune to stations that offer Visual Radio service. Th e Visual Radio ser vice uses packet data (network service) . You can listen to the FM radio while usi ng other applications. To use the Visual Radio servic e, the following conditions are required: ⢠The device must be switched on. ⢠The device must have a valid SIM car d inserted. ⢠The station you listen to and the network operator you use must support this service. ⢠A n Internet access point must be defined to access the operatorâÂÂs Visu al Radio server. ⢠The station must have the correct Visual Radio service ID defined and Visual Radio service enabled. See â Saved stations âÂÂ, p. 57 . If you do not have access to the Visual Radio service, the operators and radio stations in your area may no t support Visual Radio. The Visual Radi o service may not be available in all areas and c ountries. You can normally make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is turned off when there is an active call. When the call is finished, you may need to turn th e radio back on manual ly. The radio selects the used frequency band based on the country info rmation rec eived from the network. If this information is not available, yo u may be asked to select the region yo u are locate d in, or you can select the re gion in the Visual Radio settings. Listen to the radio Note that the quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible headset or enhancement needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. Press , and select Radio . To start a st ation search, select or . Searching st ops when a station is found. To change the frequency manually, select Options > M anual tuning .
Radio 57 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. If you have previously saved radio stations, select or to go to the next or prev ious saved station, or press the corresponding number key to select the memory location of a station. To adjust the volume, press or . To listen to the radio using the loudspeaker, select Optio ns > Acti vate loudsp. . Warning : Listen to music at a modera te level. Contin uous e xposure to hi gh volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold th e device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To view available st ations based on location, select Option s > Station directory (network service). To save the curr ent tuned station to your station list, select Options > Save stat ion . To open the list of your saved stati ons, select Opti ons > Stations . See â Saved stations âÂÂ, p. 57 . To return to the standby m ode and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availability and costs, and to subscribe to the service, contact your network o perator or service provider. To view available visual co ntent for a tuned station, select or Options > Start visual service . If the visual service ID has not been save d for the station, enter it, or s elect Retrieve to search for it in the station direct ory (netw ork serv ice). When the connection to the vi sual service is establis hed, the display shows the current visual content designed by the content provider. To adjust displ ay setti ngs for the v isual con tent view, select Option s > Display settings > Lighting or Pwr. saver time-ou t . Saved stations You can save up to 20 radio stations in the radio. To open your statio n list, select Options > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Options > Station > Listen . To view available visual content for a station with Visual Radio service, select Options > Station > Start visual service . To change station details, select Options > Sta tion > Edit .
Radio 58 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Settings Select Options > Sett ings and from the following: Start-up ton e âÂÂSelect if a tone is played when the application is started. Auto-start se rvice âÂÂSelect Yes to have the Visual Radio service start auto matically when you select a saved statio n that offers visual service . Access point âÂÂSelect th e access point used for the data connection. You do not need an access point to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. Current region âÂÂSelect the region you are currently located in. This setting is displayed only if there was no network coverage when the application was started.
Calendar 59 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar Shortcut: Press any key ( â ) in any calendar view. A meeting entry opens , and the characters y ou enter are added to the Subject field. Tip! Regularly back up the information on the device to a compatible memory card. Y o u can restore the information, such as calendar entries, to the device later. See â Memory card tool âÂÂ, p. 5 . Create calendar entries 1 Press , and select Calendar > Options > New entry and from the following: Meeting âÂÂTo remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time. Memo âÂÂTo write a general entry for a day. Anniversary âÂÂTo remind you of birthdays or special dates. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. 2 Fill in the fields. Use to move between fields. Alarm (meetings and anniversaries)âÂÂSelect On , and press to fill in the Alarm time and Alarm date fields. in the day view indicates an alarm. Repeat âÂÂPress t o change the entry to be repeat ing ( is shown in the day view). Repeat until âÂÂYou can set an end date for the repeated entry. Synchronisati on : Private âÂÂAfter synchronisation, the calendar e ntry can be seen only by you and it is not shown to others with online access to view the calendar. Public âÂÂThe calendar entr y is shown to others who have access to view your calendar online. None âÂÂThe calendar en try is not copied to your compatible PC when you synchronise. 3 To save the entry, select Done . To stop a calen dar alarm, select Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. The remind er text stays on the screen. Sele ct Stop to end the calendar alarm. Select Snooz e to set the alarm to snooze.
Calendar 60 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tip! To send a calendar note to another compatible device, select Options > Send > Via text message , Via multim edia , Via Bluetooth , or Via e -mail (avail able o nly if t he co rrect e-mail settings are in place). Tip! You can move calendar and to-do data from many different Nokia phones to your device or synchronise your calendar and to-do notes to a compatible PC using Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Set a calendar alarm You can set an alarm to remind you of meetings and anniversaries. 1 Open an entry in which you want to set an alarm, and select Alarm > On . 2 Set the Alarm time and Alarm date . 3 Scroll do wn to Repeat , and press to select how often you want the alarm to be repeated. 4 Select Done . To delete a calendar alarm, open the entry in which you want to delete an alarm, an d select Alarm > Off . Calendar views Tip! Sele ct Options > Settings to change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calendar. In the month view, dates that have calendar entries are marked with a small tri angle in the right bottom corner. In the week view, memos and anniversaries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. Press to switch between the month view, the week view, and the day view. Icons in the day and week views: Memo and Anniversary . There is no icon for Me eting . Press to jump to today. To go t o a certain date, select Options > Go to date , write the date, and select OK . Delete calendar entries Deleting past entries in Calendar saves space in your device memory. To remove more than one event at a time, go to the month view, and select Options > Delete entry and one of the following: Before date âÂÂDeletes all calendar entries th at take place before a certain date you define. All entries âÂÂDeletes all calendar entries.
Calendar 61 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar settings To modify the Calendar alarm tone , Default view , Week starts on , and Week view title , select Options > Settin gs .
Web 62 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web Various service providers ma intain pages specifically designed for mobile devices. To access these pages, press , and select Web . These pages use the wireless markup language (WML), extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or hypertext ma rkup language (HTML). Check the availabi lity of servic es, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator or service provider. Service providers will also give yo u instructions on ho w to use their services. Shortcut : To start a connect ion, press and h old in the standby mode. Access the Web ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the Web page that you want to use. See â Receive browser settings âÂÂ, p. 62 or â Enter the settings manuallyâÂÂ, p. 62 . ⢠M ake a connection to the Web. See â Ma ke a connecti on âÂÂ, p. 63 . ⢠Start browsing the pages. See â Browse âÂÂ, p. 64 . ⢠E nd the connection to the Web. See â End a connecti on âÂÂ, p. 66 . Receive browser settings Tip! Settings may be available on the Web site of a network operator or service provider. You may receive Web service settings in a special text message from the network oper ator or service provider that offers the Web page. See â Data a nd settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Enter the settings manually Follow the instructions given to you by yo ur service provider. 1 Press , select Tools > Settin gs > Connection > Access points , and define the sett ings for an acce ss point. See â Connection settings âÂÂ, p . 87 . 2 Select Web > Opti ons > Bookmark manager > Add bookmark . Write a n ame for the bookmark and th e address of the page define d for the curren t access point. 3 To set the created access poi nt as the default access point in Web , selec t Web > Options > Settings > Access point .
Web 63 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Bookmarks view Glossary: A bookmark consists of an Internet address (mandatory), bookmark title, access point, and if the Web page requires, a us er name and password. Your device may have some bookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to acces s them, you should take the same precautions, for security or content, as you would with any Internet site. Icons in the bookmark view: The starting page defined for the defaul t access poin t. If you use another default access point for browsing, the starting page is changed accordingly. The automatic bookmarks fo lder contains bookmarks ( ) that are collected auto matically when you browse pages. The bookmarks in this folder are automatical ly orga nised acco rding to domai n. Any bookmark showing the title or Internet address of the bookmark. (If available) Folder th at contains bookmarks for downloading content. Add bookmarks manually 1 In the bookmarks view, select Options > Bookmark manager > Add bo okmark . 2 Start to fill in the fiel ds. Only the URL address must be defined. The default access point is assig ned to the bookmark if no other one is selected. Press to enter special characters s uch as / , ., : , an d @ . Press to clear cha racters. 3 Sele ct Options > Sa ve to save the bookmark. Send bookmarks Scroll to a bookmark , and select Optio ns > Se nd > Via text message . Press to send. It is po ssible to s end more than one bookmark at the same time. Make a connection After you store all the requir ed connection settings, you can access the pages. 1 Select a bookmark or enter the address in the field ( ) . When you enter the addres s, matching bookmarks are shown above the field. Press t o select a matching bookmark. 2 Press to start to download the pag e.
Web 64 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connection security If the security indicato r is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the Internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between the gate way and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. The service provi der secures th e data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Select Option s > Details > Security to view details about the connection, encryptions status, and information about server and user authentication. Security features may be required for some services, such as b anking serv ices. For such co nnections you need security certificates. For more information, contact your service provider. See also â Certificate management âÂÂ, p. 91 . Browse Important: Use only services that you tr ust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. On a browser page, new links appear underlined in blue and images that act as links have a blue border around them. To open a link, to check boxes, a nd make selections, press . Shortcut: Use to j ump to the end of a page and to the beginning of a page. To go to the previous page while browsing, select Back . If Back is not available, select Options > Navigation options > History to view a chronological list of the pages you have visited during a brow sing session. The history list is cleared each time a session is closed. To retrieve the latest cont ent from the server, select Options > Navi gation opti ons > Reload . To save a bookmark, select Options > Save as bookmark . Tip! To access the bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold . To return to the browser view, select Op tions > Back to page . To save a page while browsing, select Options > Advanc ed options > Save page . You can save pages to the device memory or a compatible me mory card (i f inserte d), and browse them when offline. To access the pages later, press in the bookmarks view to open the Saved pages view. To enter a new URL address, select Options > Navigation options > Go to we b address .
Web 65 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To open a sublist of commands or actions for the currently open page, select Options > Service options . You can download files that cannot be shown on the browser page, such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your device, for example, a downloaded image is saved in Gallery . Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, tran sferred or forwarded. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and pro tection against harmful software. Tip! Your browser collects bookmark s automatically while you browse Web pages. The bookmarks are stored to the automatic bookmarks fol der ( ) and automatically organised according to domain. See also â Web settings âÂÂ, p. 66 . View saved pages If you regularly browse pages containing inf o rmation that does not change very often, yo u can save and browse them when offline. In the saved pa ges view you ca n also create folders to store your saved browser pages. To open the saved pages view , press in the bookmarks view. In the saved pages view, press to open a saved page ( ). To save a page while browsing, select Options > Ad vanced options > Save page . To start a connection to the browser service and to download the latest ve rs ion of the page, select Options > Navigation options > Reload . The device stays online after you reload the page. Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and vide o clips. These i tems can be provided free, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respec tive applications in your device, for example, a downlo aded photo can be saved in Gallery . Important: Only install and use applications and other software fr om sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful sof t ware. 1 To download the item, scroll to the link, and press . 2 Select the appropriate option t o purchase the item, for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ.
Web 66 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 Carefully read all the information provided. To continue the download, select Accept . To cancel the download, select Cancel . Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), a nd other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. End a connection Select Options > Advanced options > Disconnect to end the connection and view the browser page offline , or Options > Exit to end the connection and close the browser. Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location that is used t o store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information re quiring passwo rds, empty the cache after each use. The info rmation or services you h a ve accessed are stored in the cache. T o empty the cache, select Op tions > Advanced options > Clear cache . Web settings Select Options > Setting s and from the following: Access point âÂÂTo change the default acc ess point, press to open a list of available access points. See â Connection settings âÂÂ, p. 87. Load imgs. & sounds âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to load images while browsing. If you select No , to load images later during browsing, select Options > Show images. Font size âÂÂTo choose the text size. Default enco ding âÂÂIf te xt character s are not shown correctly, you may choose an other encoding according to langua ge. Automatic bookmarks âÂÂTo disable automatic book mark collecting, select Off . If you want to continue collecting automatic bookmarks but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . Screen size âÂÂTo select what is sh o wn when you are browsing. Select Select. keys only or Full screen . Homepage âÂÂTo define the home page. Search page âÂÂTo define a Web page that is downloaded when you select Options > Navigation opti ons > Open search page in the bookmarks view, or when browsing.
Web 67 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Volume âÂÂIf you want the browser to play sounds embedded on Web pages, select a volume level. Rende ring âÂÂIf you want the page layout shown as accurately as possible, select By qua lity . If you do not want external cascading style sheets to be downloaded, select By speed . Cookies âÂÂTo enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Glossary: Cookies are a means of content providers to identify users and their preferences for frequently used content. Java/ECMA script âÂÂTo enable or disabl e the use of scripts. Security warnings âÂÂTo hide or show security notifications. Serial no. se nding âÂÂTo enable or disa ble serial number sending. Some service provid ers may require that you enable this function before Web browsing is possible. Conf. DTM F sending âÂÂChoose whether you want to confirm before the device sends DTMF tones during a voice call. See also â Option s duri ng a cal l âÂÂ, p. 14 .
My own 68 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own Games Press , and select My own and a game. For instructions on how to play the game, select Opti ons > Help . Music player Press , and select My own > Music . With the music player, you can play music f iles and create and listen to playlists. Shortcut : To start music player press in the standby mode. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the de vice near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To view songs sort ed by their album or artist, select Albums or Artists . The album and artist information is collected from the ID3 tags of the song files, if avail able. To copy or move files to a compatible memory card or to device memory, select a file and Options > Organise > Copy to memory card / Move to memory card or Copy to phone mem. / Mo ve to phone mem. . Files stored on the memory card are indicated with . Copyright protections may prevent some music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Play music To play music, select All songs , Playlists, Artists, Album s , or Recently added and a song. The selected song and other songs in the view start to play. To open a view that displays information about the song that is currently playing, select Go to Now playing . To change between play and pause, press the scroll key. To fast forward in a s ong, pr ess and hold . To rewind, press and hold . To adjust the volume, press or . To start playing the next or previous song, press or .
My own 69 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To select between random play and normal play mode, select Options > Shuffle . To choose whether playing stops at the end of the playlist or restarts from the beginning of the playlist, selec t Option s > Repeat . To search for songs in a song list, press the number keys to enter letters in th e search box. To select several songs for playlists or deletion, press and hold while you press or . To delete songs, select th em, and press . Deleting a song removes it permanently fr om the memory card and the device memory. Playlists The music player supports .m3u simple playlists. Copy playlists with music files, or create them in the music player. To add songs, albums, or artists to a playlist, select the items and Options > Add to a playlist . You can create a new playlist or add to an existing one. To listen to a playlist, select Playlists and a playlist. To delete a playl ist, scroll t o it, and press . D eleting a playlist only deletes the playlist, not the music files. Go toâÂÂadd sho rtcuts Default shortcuts: opens Calendar , opens Inbox , and opens Notes . To store shortcuts (links to your favourite images, notes, bookmarks, and so on), press , and select My own > Go to . Shortcuts are added only from the individual applications. Not all applications hav e this function. 1 Select an item from an ap plication to which you want to add a shortcut. 2 Sele ct Option s > Add to 'Go to' . A shortcu t in Go to is automatically updated if y ou move the item to which it is pointing (for example, from one folder to another). To change the identifier in the lower left corner of the shortcut icon, select Options > Shortcut icon . Delete a shortcut Select the shortcut, and press . The default shortcuts Notes , Calendar , and Inbox cannot be deleted. When you remove an application or a document which has a shortcut in Go to , the shortcut icon of the removed item is dimmed in the Go to view. The shortcut can be deleted next time you start Go to .
My own 70 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. IMâÂÂinstant messaging (chat) Press , and select My own > IM . Instant messaging (network service) allows you to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service providers maintain IM servers that you can log in to after you register to an IM service. Select Conversatio ns to start or co ntinue a conversation with an IM use r; IM contacts to create, edit, or view the online status of your IM contacts; I M groups to start or continue a group conversation with multiple IM users; or Recorded chats to view a previous inst ant messaging session that you have sa ved. Note: Check the availability of chat services, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator and/ or service provider. Service providers will also giv e you instructions on how to use their services. Receive IM settings You must save the settings to access the service that you want to use. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the network ope rator or service provider that offers the IM ser vice. See â Data and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . You can also enter the settings manually. See â Chat server settings âÂÂ, p. 73 . Connect to an IM server Tip: To log in automatically when you start IM , select Op tions > Sett ings > Server settings > IM login type > On app. start-up . 1 Open IM to have your device co nnect to the IM server in use. To change the IM server in use and save new IM servers, see â Chat server settings âÂÂ, p. 73 . 2 Enter your user I D and pa ssword, and press to log in. You obtain the user ID and pa ssword fo r the IM server from your service provider. You can select Cancel to stay offline; to log in to the IM server later, select Option s > Login . You cannot send or receive me ssages while you are of fline. 3 To log out, select Options > Lo gout . Modify your IM settings Select Options > Setting s > IM settings and from the following: Use screen name (shown only if IM groups are supported by the server)âÂÂTo enter a nickname, select Yes . IM presence âÂÂTo allow others to see if you are online, select Active for al l .
My own 71 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Allow messa ges from âÂÂTo allow messages from all, select All . Allow invitations from âÂÂTo allow invitations only from your IM contacts, select IM contact s only . IM invitations are sent by IM contacts who wa nt you to join their groups. Msg. scrolling speed âÂÂTo select th e speed at which new messages are displayed. Sort IM contacts âÂÂTo sort your IM contacts Alphabetically or By online status . Availability reloading âÂÂTo choose how to update information about whether your IM contacts are online or offline, select Automati c or Manual . Search for IM groups and users To searc h for groups , in th e IM groups view, select Option s > Se arch . You can sear ch by Group name , T opic , and Members (u ser ID). To searc h for user s, in the IM cont acts view, select Option s > New IM contact > Search from server . You can search by User's name , User ID, Phon e number , and E-mail address . Join and leave an IM group To join an IM group that you have saved, scroll to the group, and press . To join an IM group not on th e list, but for which you know the group ID, select Options > Join ne w group . Enter the group ID, and press . To leave the IM group, select Option s > Leave IM group . Chat After you join an IM group, yo u can view th e messages that are exchanged there, and send your own messages. To send a message, write the mess age in the message editor field, and press . To send a private message to a participant, select Options > Se nd private msg. , select the recipient, write the message, and press . To reply to a private message sent to you, select the message and Option s > Reply . To invite IM contacts who are online to join the IM gro up, select Op tions > Send invit ation , select the contacts you want to invite, write the invi tati on message, and press . To prevent receiving messages from certain participants, select Options > Blocking options and the desired option.
My own 72 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Record chats To record to a file the messages th at are exchanged during a conversation or while you are joined in a IM group, select Options > Record chat , enter a na me for the conversation file, and press . To stop recording, select Options > Stop recording . The recorded conversation files are automatically saved in Recorded chats . To view the recorded chats, in the main view, select Recorded chats , select the conversation, and press . View and start conversations Go to the Co nversations view to see a list of the indiv idual conversation participants that you have an ongoing conversa tion with. To view a conversation, scro ll to a participant, and press . To continue the conversation, write your message, and press . To return to the conversations list without closing the conversation, sel ect Back . To close the conversation, select Opti ons > End conversation . Ongoing conversations are automatically closed when you exit IM . To start a new c onversation, select Opt ions > New conversation and from the following: Select recipient âÂÂTo se e a list of your chat contacts that are currently online. Scroll to the contact that y ou want to start a conversation with, and press . Enter use r ID âÂÂTo enter the user ID of the user you want to start a conversation with, and press . Glossary: Th e user ID is provided by the ser vice provider to those who register to this service. To save a conversation partic ipant to your IM contacts, scroll to the part icipant , and selec t Options > Add to IM contacts . To send automatic replies to incoming messages, select Options > Se t auto reply on . Enter the text , and select Done . You can still receive messages. IM contacts Go to the IM contacts to retrieve chat contact lists from the server, or to add a new chat contact to a contact list. When you log in to the server, the previously used chat contact list is retrieved from the server automatically.
My own 73 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Manage IM groups Go to the IM groups view to see a list of the IM groups that you have saved or are currently joined to. Chat server settings Select Options > Sett ings > Server sett ings . You may receive the se ttings in a special text message from the network operator or service provider that o ffers the chat service. You obtain the user ID and password from your service provider when you register to the service. If you do not know your user ID or pa ssword, contact your servic e provider. To change the IM server to which you wish to connect, select Default server . To add a new server to your list of I M servers, select Servers > Options > New server . Enter the following settings: Server name âÂÂEnter the name for the chat server. Access point in use âÂÂSelect the access point you want to use for the server. Web address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the IM server. User ID âÂÂEnter your user ID. Password âÂÂEnter your login password.
Connectivity 74 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity Bluetooth connectivity You can connect wirelessly to other compatible devices with Bluetooth wireless technology. Compatible devi ces may include mobile phones, co mputers, and enhancements such as hea dsets and car kits. You can use Bluetooth wireless technology to send images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes; to connect wirelessly to your compatible PC (for example, to transfer files); or to connect to a compatible printer to print images with Image print . See â Image print âÂÂ, p. 35 . Since devices with Bluetooth wireless technology communicate using radio waves, your device and the other device do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within 10 metres (32 feet) of each other, although the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions su ch as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following profiles: Basic Printing Profile, Generic Access Profile, Seri al Port Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, Headset Profile, Handsfree Pro file, Generic Object Exchange Profile, Object Push Profile, File Transfer Profile, Basic Imaging Profile, and Human Interface Device Profile. To ensure interoperabilit y between other devices supporting Bluetooth wireless technology, use Nokia approv ed enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Glossary: A profile corresponds to a se rvi ce or a function, and defines how different devices connect . For example the Handsfree Profile is used between the handsfree device and the mobile device. For devices to be compatible, they must support the same profiles. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth wireless technology in some lo cation s. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features using Bluetooth wire less technology, or allowing such features to run in th e background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, you cannot use B luetooth connectivity. See â Security âÂÂ, p. 90 for more in formation on locking the device.
Connectivity 75 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Bluetooth connectivity settings Press , and select Connec t. > Bluetoot h . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. After you set Bluetooth connectivity on and change My phone's visibil ity to Shown to all , your device and this name can be seen by other users with devices using Bluetooth wireless technology. Select from the following: Bluet ooth âÂÂSelect On or Off . To connect wirelessly to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth connectivity On , and then establish a connection. My phone's visibility âÂÂTo allow your device to be found by other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology, select Shown to all . To hide it from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's na me âÂÂEdit the name of your device. Security tips When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, set Bluetooth Off , or select My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with an unknown device. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity There can be se veral active Bluetooth connections at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. Bluetooth connectivity indicators ⢠W hen is shown in the standby mode, a Bluetooth connecti on is act ive. ⢠When is blinking, your device is trying to connect to the other devi ce. ⢠When is shown c ontinuo usly, the B luetooth connecti on is act ive. Tip! To send text using Bluetooth connectivity (instead of text messages), open Notes , write the text, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . 1 Open an application where the item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to anothe r compatible device, open Gallery . 2 Select the item (for example, an image) and Opt ions > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that ar e within ra nge start to appear on the display one by one. You can see a device icon, the name of the device, the device type, or a short name.
Connectivity 76 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tip! If you hav e searched for devices earl ier, a list of the devices that were found previously is shown first. To start a new search, select More devi ces . If yo u switch off the device, the list is cleared. Device icons: âÂÂComputer; âÂÂPhone; âÂÂAudio or vid eo; â Headset; âÂÂOther. To interrupt the search, press Stop . The device list freezes. 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a pass code. See â Pair devices âÂÂ, p. 76 . 5 When the connection has been established, Se nding data is shown. The Sent fold er in Messaging does not store messages sent using Bluetooth conn ectivity. Tip! When searching for device s, some devices may show only the unique addr esses (device addresses). To find the unique address of your device, enter the code *#2820# in the standby mode. Pair devices Glossary: Pairing means authenti cation. The users of the two devices with Blueto oth wireless technology should agree on a common passcode, and use the same passcode for both devices in order to pair them. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. In the Bluetoot h main view, press to open the paired devices view ( ). Before pairin g, create you r own passcode (1âÂÂ16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. The passcode is used only once. To pair with a device, select Option s > New paired device . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that are within range start to appear on the displ ay one by one. Select the device , and en ter the passc ode. T he same pa sscode must be entered on the other device as well. After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices view. Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. Tip! To define a short name (nickname or alias) for a paired device, scroll to the device, and select Options > Assign shor t name in the paired devices view. This name helps you to recognise a certain device during device se arch or when a devic e requests a connection.
Connectivity 77 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To set a device t o be authoris ed or unaut horise d, scroll to a device, select Options and from the following: Set as authorised âÂÂConnections between your device and this device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorised devices in the paired devices view . Set as unauthorise d âÂÂConnection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Option s > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings, select Option s > Delete all . Tip! If you are curren t ly connected to a devic e and delete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately, and the connection is switched off. Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data using Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are a sked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messagi ng . Message s received using Bluetooth conne ctivity are indicated by . See â InboxâÂÂreceive messages âÂÂ, p. 46 . Switch off Bluetooth connectivity To switch off Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off . PC connections You can use your device with a variety of PC connectivity and data communications applications. With Nokia PC Suite you ca n synchronise contacts, calendar, and to-do notes, and transfer images between your device and a compatible PC. Always create the connection from the PC to synchronise with your devi ce. For further information on how to install Nokia PC Suite (compatible with Windows 2000 and Windows XP), see the user guide for Nokia PC Suite and the Nok ia PC Suite help in the "Install" section on the CD-ROM.
Connectivity 78 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. CD-ROM The CD-ROM should launch after you have inserted it into the CD-ROM drive of a compatible PC. If not, proceed as follows: Open Windows Explorer, right-click the CD-ROM drive where you inserted the CD-ROM, and se lect Autoplay. Your device as a modem You can use your device as a modem to send and receive e-mail, or to connect to the Internet with a compatible PC by using Bluetooth connectiv ity or a compatible data cable. Detailed installation inst ructions can be found in the user guide for Nokia PC Suite in Modem options on the CD-ROM. Tip! When using Nokia P C Suite for the first time, to connect your device to a compatible PC and to use Nokia PC Suite, use the Get Connected wiz ard available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Connection manager You may have multiple data connections active at the same time when you are using your device in GSM networks. Press , and select Connect. > Con n. mgr. to view the status of multiple data connections, view details on the amount of data sent and received, and end connections. When you open Conn. mgr. , you can see the following: ⢠Open data connections: da ta calls ( ) and packet data connections ( ) ⢠The statu s of each co nnection ⢠The amount of data uploaded and downloaded for each connection (shown for packet data connections only) ⢠The duration of each conne ction (shown for dat a calls only) Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To end a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Options > Disconnec t . To close all currently open connections, select Options > Disconnect all .
Connectivity 79 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. View data connection details To view the details of a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Options > Details . Name âÂÂThe name of the Internet access point (I AP) in use, or the modem connection name if the connection is a dial-up connection. Bearer âÂÂThe type of data connection: Data call , High sp. GSM , or Packet data . Status âÂÂThe current status of the connection: Connec ting , Conn.(in act.) , Conn.(active) , On hold , Disconnctng. , o r Disconnected . Rece ived âÂÂThe amount of data, in bytes, received to your device. Sent âÂÂThe amount of data, in bytes, sent from your device. Duration âÂÂThe length of time that the connection has been open. Speed âÂÂThe current speed of both sending and receiving data in kilobytes per second. Dial-up âÂÂThe dial-up number used. Name âÂÂAccess point name used. Shared (not shown if the connection is not shared)âÂÂThe number of applications using the same connectio n. Remote synchronisation Press , and select Connect. > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronise your notes, ca lendar, and contacts with various calendar and address book applications on a compatible computer or on the Internet. The synchronisation applicatio n uses SyncML technology for synchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the supplier of the calendar or address book application you want to synchronise your data with. You may receive syncronisation settings in a special text message. See â Data and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . Create a new syn chronisation profile 1 If no profiles have been define d, your device asks if you want to create a new profile. Select Yes . To create a new profile in addition to existing ones, select Option s > New sync pro file . Choose whether you wa nt to us e the defau lt setting values or copy the values from an existing profil e to be used as the basis for the new profile. 2 Define the following: Sync profile name âÂÂWrite a descriptive n ame for the profile.
Connectivity 80 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Data bearer âÂÂSelect the connection type: Web , or Bluetooth . Access point (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web )âÂÂSelect an access point to use for the data connecti on. Host address âÂÂThe IP address of the host server. Contact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. Port (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web )â Contact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. User name âÂÂYour user ID for the synchronisation server. Contact your service pr ovider or system administrator for your correct ID. Password âÂÂWrite your password. Contact your service provider or system administr ator for the correct value. Allow sync r equests âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to allow the server to start a synchronisation. Accept all sync reqs. âÂÂSelect No if you want your device to ask you before a sy nchronisation initialised by the server is started. Network au thentic. (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web )âÂÂSelect Yes to enter a network user name and password. Press to view the user name and password fields. Press to select Contacts , Cale ndar , or Notes . ⢠Select Yes if you want to synchronise the selected database. ⢠In Remote database , enter a correct path to the remote calendar, address boo k, or notes database on the server. ⢠Select Synchronisation type : Normal (two-way synchronisation) , To server only , or To phon e only . 3 Select Bac k to save the settings and return to the main view. Synchronise data In the Sync main view, you can see the different synchronisat ion profiles and the kind of data to be synchronised. 1 Select a synchronisation profile and Options > Synchronise . The status of the synchronisation is shown at the bottom of the screen. To cancel synchronisation be fore it finishe s, select Cancel . 2 You are notified when the sy nchronisation is complete. After synchronisation is complete, select Options > View log to open a log file showing the sync hronisation status ( Comple te or Incomplete ) and how many calendar or contact entries, or notes have been added, updated, deleted, or disc ar ded (not synchro nised) in your device or on the server.
Connectivity 81 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Device manager Press , and select Connec t. > Dev. mgr. . You may receive server profiles and differ ent configuration settings from your network operator, service provi der, or company information management department. These configura tion settings may include a ccess point settings for da ta connections and other settings used by different applications in your device. To connect to a server and receive configuration settings for your device, scroll to a profile, and select Opt ions > Start configuration . To allow or deny receiv ing of configuration settings from service providers, select Option s > Enable config. or Disable config. . Server profile settings Contact your service provider for th e co rrect settings. Server name âÂÂEnter a name for the configuration server . Server ID âÂÂEnter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. Server password âÂÂE nter a password to identify your device to the server. Access point âÂÂSelect an access p oin t to be used when connecting to the ser ver. Host address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the server. Port âÂÂEnter the port number of the ser ver. User name and Password âÂÂEnter your user name and passwo rd. Allow config uratio n âÂÂTo receive configuration settings from the server, select Yes . Auto-accept all reqs. âÂÂIf you want your device to ask for confirmation before acceptin g a configuration from the server, select No .
Office 82 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Office Calculator To add, substract, multiply, divide, calculate sq uare roots and percentages, press , and selec t Office > Calculator . Note: This calculator has limited acc uracy and is designed for simple calculations. To save a number in the memory (indicat ed by M ), select Op tions > Memory > Save . To retrieve a number in memory, select Options > Memory > Re call . To clear a number in memory, select Optio n s > Memory > Clear . Calculate percentage s 1 Enter a number for which you want to calculate a percentage. 2 Select , , , or . 3 Enter the percentage. 4 Select . Converter To convert measures such as Lengt h from one unit ( Yards ) to another ( Metres ), press , and select Office > Converte r . Note that Converter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. 1 Scroll to the Type field, and press to open a list of measures. Scro ll to the measure you wa nt to use, and select OK . 2 Scroll to the first Unit field, and press . Select the unit from which you want to convert and OK . Scroll to the next Unit field, and select the unit to which you want to convert. 3 Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Press to add a decimal and for the , - (for tempe rature), and E (exponent) symbols. Tip! To change the conversion order, enter the value in the second Amount field. The result is shown in the first Amount field.
Office 83 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Set base currency an d exchange rates Before you can make currency convers ions, you need to choose a base curre ncy and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency determines th e conversion rates of the other currencies. 1 Select Converter > Options > Currency rates . A list of currencies opens, and you can see the current base currency at the top. Tip! To rename a currency, go to the currency rates view, scroll to the currency, and select Options > Rename currency . 2 To change the base currency , scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base curr . . 3 Add exchange rates. Scroll to the currency, and enter a new rate, that is, how many units of the curr ency equal one unit of the base currency you have selected. After you have inserted all the ne cessary exchange rates, you can make currency convers ions. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter the new r ates because all previously set exchange rates are set to zero. To-do Press , and select Office > To-do to write notes and maintain a task list. To add a note, press any key to st art to write the task in the Subject field. To set the due date for the task, scroll to the Due date field, and enter a date. To set the priority for the To-do note, scroll to the Priority field, and press to select the priority. The priority icons are ( High ) and ( Low ). There is no icon for Normal . To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the To-do list, and select Options > Mark as done . To restore a task, scroll to it in the To-do list, and select Options > Mark as not done .
Office 84 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Notes Press , and select Office > Notes to write notes. You can send notes to other compatible devices and save pla in text files (.txt format) that you receive to Notes . Recorder Press , and select Office > Recorder to record telephone conversations and voice memos. If you are recording a telephone conversation, both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording.
Tools 85 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools Settings To change settings, press , and select Tools > Settings . Scroll to a setting group, and press to open it. Scroll to a setting you want to change, and press . Phone settings General Phone language âÂÂChanging the langua ge of the display texts in your device also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language accord ing to the information on your SIM card. After you change the display text language, the device restarts. Changing the settings for Phone languag e or Writing language affects every ap plication in your device, and the change remains effective unt il you change these settings again. Writing language âÂÂChanging the language affects the charac ters and special cha rac ters available w hen writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Dictionary âÂÂYou can set the predictive text input On or Off for all editor s in the device. The predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. Welcome note or logo âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch o n the device. Sele ct Default to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note (up to 50 letters ), or Image to select a photo or picture from Gallery . Orig. phone settings âÂÂYou can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. See â Phone and SIM âÂÂ, p. 90 . After res etting, the device may take a longer time to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Standby mode Active standby âÂÂUse shortcuts to applications in the standby mode on the main display. See â Active standby mode âÂÂ, p. 10 .
Tools 86 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Left sele ction key âÂÂTo assign a shortcut to the left selection key ( ) in the standby mode, select an application from the list. Right selection key âÂÂTo assign a shortcut to the right selection key ( ) in the standby mode, select an application from the list. Active standby apps. âÂÂTo select the application shortcuts you want to appear in the active standby. This setting is only available if Active standby is on. You can also assign keypad shortc uts for the different presses of the scroll key, by selecting an applicat ion from the list. These scroll key shortc uts are not available if the active standby is on. Operator logo âÂÂThis setting is visible only if you have received and saved an operato r logo. You can choose if you want the operator logo to show or not. Display Brightness âÂÂYou c an change the brightness of the displ ay to lighter or darker. The br ightness o f the display is automatically adjusted according to the environment. Pwr. saver time-out âÂÂThe power saver on the display is activated when the timeout period is over. Light ti me-out âÂÂSelect a time-out after wh ich the backlight of the main display is switched off. Call settings Se nd m y c al le r I D âÂÂYou can set your phone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your network operator or service provider wh en you make a subscri ption ( Set by netw ork ) (network service). Call waiting âÂÂIf you have activated call waiting (network service), the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. Select Activate to request the network to activate call waiting, Cancel to request the network to deac tiv ate call waiting, or Check status to check if the function is active or not. Reject call with SMS âÂÂSelect Yes to send a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the call. See â Answer or reject a call âÂÂ, p. 13 . Message text âÂÂWrite a text to be sent in a text message when you reject a call. Automatic redial âÂÂSelect On , and your devic e makes a maximum of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic redialing, press . Summary after call âÂÂActivate this setting if you want the device to briefly display the approximat e duration of the last call.
Tools 87 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Speed dialling âÂÂSelect On , and the numbers assigned to the speed dialing keys ( â ) can be dialed by pressing and holding the key. See also â Speed dial a phone number âÂÂ, p. 12 . Anykey answer âÂÂSelect On , and you can a nswer an incoming call by briefly pressing any keypa d key, except , , , and . Line in use âÂÂThis setting (network servic e) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which p hone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Call s on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have no t subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown i n the standby mode. Tip! To switch between the phone lines, press and hold in the standby mode. Line change âÂÂTo prevent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Connection settings Data connections and access points Your device supports packet da ta connections ( ), such as GPRS in the GSM network. Glossary: General packet radio service (GPR S) uses packet data technology wher e information is sent in short packets of data over the mobile network. To establish a data connection, an access point is r e quired. You can define different kinds of access points, such as: ⢠MMS access point to send and rec eive multimedia messages ⢠Access point for the Web application to view WML or XHTML pages ⢠I nternet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-ma il Check the type of access point you need with your service provider for the service you want to acc ess. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your network opera tor or service provider.
Tools 88 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Packet data conne ctions in GSM networks When you use your devi ce in GSM n etworks, mu ltiple d ata connections can be active at the same time and access points can s hare a data connection. To check the active data connections, see â Connection manager âÂÂ, p. 78 . The following indicators may be displayed below the signal indicator, depending on which network you use: GSM network, packet data is available in the network. GSM network, packet data connecti on is active, data is being transferred. GSM network, multiple packet da ta connections are active. GSM network, packet da ta connection is on hold. (This can happen during a voice call, for example.) Receive access point setti ngs You may receive access point settings in a text message from a service provider, or you may have preset access point settings in your device. See â D ata and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . To create a new access point, press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . An access point may be protected ( ) by your network operator or service provider. Protected access points cannot be edited or deleted. Access points Tip! See also â Receive MMS and e-mail settings âÂÂ, p. 45 , â E-mail âÂÂ, p. 53 , and â Access the We b âÂÂ, p. 62 . Follow the instructions given to you by yo ur service provider. Connection name âÂÂGive a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer âÂÂDepending on the data connection you select, only cert ain setting fiel ds are availab le. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have bee n instructed otherwise by your service provider. To be able to use a data connection, the ne twork service provider must support this fe ature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Access point name (for packet data only)âÂÂThe access point name is needed to establish a connection to the packet data network. You obta in the access point name from your network operator or service provider. User name âÂÂThe user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. The user name is of ten case-sensitive. Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter a new password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes .
Tools 89 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Password âÂÂA password may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. The password is often case-sensitive. Authentication âÂÂS elect Normal or Secure . Homepage âÂÂDepending on what you are setting up, write the Web address or the address of the multimedia messaging center. Select Options > Advan ced settin gs to change the following settings: Network type âÂÂSelect the Internet protocol type to use: IPv4 settings or IPv6 settings . The other settings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP address (for IPv4)âÂÂEnter the IP address of your device. Name servers âÂÂIn Primary name server: , enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. In Second. name server: , enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your Internet servic e p rovider to obtain these addresses. Glossary: The domain name service (DNS) is an Internet service that tr anslates domain names s uch as www.nokia-asia.com into IP addresses like 192.100.124.195. Proxy serv. address âÂÂDefine the address for the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connectio n. Packet data conn. âÂÂIf you se lect When available an d you are in a network that suppor ts packet data, the device registers to the packet data network. Also, starting an active packet data connection is qui cker (for example, to send and receive e-mail). If you select When nee ded , the device uses a packet data connection only if you start an applica tion or action that n eeds it. If there is no packet data coverage an d you select W hen available, the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. Access point âÂÂThe access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to your computer. Configurations You may receive trusted server settings f rom your network operator or service provider in a configuration message, or the settings may be stored on your SIM card. You can save these settings to your device, view or delete them in Configurations .
Tools 90 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Date and time See â Clock settings âÂÂ, p . 3 . See also the language settings in â General âÂÂ, p. 85 . Security Phone and SIM PIN code request âÂÂWhen active, the code is requested each time the device is sw itched on. Deactivating the personal identification numbe r (PIN) code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. See â Glossary of PIN and lock codes âÂÂ, p. 91 . PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code âÂÂYou can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . See â Glossary of PIN and lock codes âÂÂ, p. 91 . Avoid using access co des similar to t he emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. Autolock period âÂÂYou can set an autolock period, a time-out after which the devi ce automat ically locks and can be used only if the correc t lock code is entered. Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select None to turn off the autolock period. To unlock the device, enter the lock code. When the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device. Tip! To lock the device manually, press . A list of commands opens. Sele ct Lock phone . Lock if SIM changed âÂÂYou can set the device to ask for the lock code w hen an un known SIM card is ins erted into your device. The device maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Closed user group âÂÂYou can specify a group of people to whom you can cal l and who can call y ou (network serv ice). When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM se rvices âÂÂYou can set the device to display confirmatio n messages when you are usin g a SIM card service (network service).
Tools 91 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Glossary of PIN and lock codes If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification num ber (PIN) codeâÂÂThis cod e protects your SIM card against u n authorized use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the PIN code is blocked, and you need to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. S ee the information about the PUK code in this section. PIN2 codeâÂÂThis code (4 to 8 digit s) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in yo ur device. Lock code (also known as security code)âÂÂThis code (5 digits) can be used to lock the device to avoid unauthorized use. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorized use of your devic e, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate fr om your device. Personal unblocking key (PUK) code and PUK2 codeâÂÂThese codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the op erator whose SIM card is in your device. Certificate management Digital certificates do not guar antee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. Glossary: Digital certificates are used to verify the origin of the XHTML or WML pages and installed software. However, they ca n only be trusted if the origin of the cert ificate is known to be authentic. In the certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority certificates th at are stored in your device. Press to see a list of personal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferr i ng confidential information. They should also be used if yo u want to reduce the risk of viruses or oth er malicious software and be su re of the authenticity of software wh en downloading and installing software.
Tools 92 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain co rrect, authentic, or trusted certificates for in c reased security to be available. If Expired certi f icate or Certif icate no t valid yet is shown even if the certificate sh ould be valid, check that the current date and time in your device a re correc t. View certificat e detailsâÂÂcheck authen ticity You can only be sure of the correct id entity of a server when the signature and the peri od of validity of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified on the device display if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Op tions > Certificate d etails . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: ⢠Certif icate not t rusted âÂÂYou have not set any application to use the certificat e. See â Change the trust settings âÂÂ, p. 92 . ⢠Expire d certi ficate âÂÂThe period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certif icate n ot valid y et âÂÂThe period of validity has not yet begun for the selected cer tificate. ⢠Certif icate co rrupte d âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificat e issuer. Change the t rust settin gs Before changing a ny certificate settings , you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Options > Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certi ficate is shown. For example: ⢠Symbian installa tion : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet : Yes âÂÂThe ce rtificate is able to certify servers. ⢠App. installation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java application. ⢠Online certif. check âÂÂSelect to check the online certificates before in stalling an application. Select Options > Edit trust s etting to change the value.
Tools 93 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Call diverting Call d ivert a l l o w s y o u t o d i v e r t y o u r i n c o m i n g c a l l s t o y o u r voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. 1 Press , and select Tools > Settings > Call diver t . 2 Select which calls you want to divert: Voice calls , Data calls , or Fax calls . 3 Select the desired divert option. To divert voice calls when your number is busy or when you r eject incoming calls, select If busy . 4 Set the divert option on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is activated ( Check s tatus ). Several divert options can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring and call di verting cannot be active at the same time. Call barring Call barring (network service) allows you to restric t the calls that you make or receive with the device. To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Acti vate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is active ( Check sta tus ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Call barring and call di verting cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. Network Your device uses the GSM network. The GSM ne twork is indicated with in the standby mod e. Operator selec tion âÂÂSelect Automatic to set the device to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list of networks. If th e connectio n to the manuall y select ed network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home netw ork, that is, the operator whose SIM card is in your device. Glossary: A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers.
Tools 94 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Cell info display âÂÂSelect On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microc ellular network (MCN) technology and t o activate cell info reception. Enhancement settings Indicators shown in the standby mode: A headset is connected. A loopset is connected. The headset is u navailable, or Bluetooth connectivity to a headset is lost. Select Headset , Loopset , or Bluetooth han dsfree , and t he following options are available: Default profile âÂÂto set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain enhancement to your device. See â ProfilesâÂÂset tones âÂÂ, p. 8 . Automatic ans wer âÂÂto set the device to answer an incoming call automatically afte r 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer is disabled. Voice commands You can use voice commands to control your device. For more information about the enhanced voice commands supported by your device, see â Voice dialing âÂÂ, p. 12 . To activate enhanced vo ice commands for starting applications or profiles, you must open the Voice com. application and its Pro file s folder. Press , and select Tools > Voice com. > Profiles ; the device creates voice tags for the applications an d profiles. To use enhanced voice commands , press and hold and say a voice command. The voice command is the n ame of the application or profile displayed in the list. To add more applications to the list, select Options > New application . To add a second voice command that can be used to start the application, scroll to it, select Options > Change command , and enter the new voice command as text. Avoid very short names, abbreviations, and acronyms. To change voice command settings, select Options > Settings . To switch off the s ynthesizer tha t plays recognised voice tags and commands in the selected device language, sele ct Synt hesise r > Off . To reset voice recognition learning, for examp le, when the main user of the device has c hanged, select Reset voice adapts. .
Tools 95 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Application manager Press , and select Tools > Manager . You can install tw o types of applications and software to your device: ⢠J2ME⢠applications based on Java⢠technology with the extension .jad or .jar ( ). ⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system ( ). The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install software specifically designed for your Nokia N72. Software providers will often refer t o the official model number of this product: the Nokia N72-5. Install ation file s may be transf erred to your device fr om a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using Bluetoot h connectivity. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nok ia PC Suite to install an application to your device or a compatible memory card. If you use Microsoft Windows Explor er to transfer a file, save the file to a compatible memory card (local disk). Example: If you have received the installation file as an e-mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e-mail, open the attachments view, scroll to the installation file, and pres s to start installation. Install applications and software Tip! You can also use Nokia Application Installer available in Nokia PC Suite to install applications. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Application icons are as follows: .sis application; Java application; applicatio n is not fully install ed; application is installed on a memory card. Important: Only install and use applications and other software fr om sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful sof t ware. Before installation, note the following: ⢠To view the application type, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer o f the application, select Options > View details . ⢠To display the secu rity certificat e details of the application, select Options > View certificate . See â Certificate management âÂÂ, p. 91. ⢠If you install a file that cont ains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you ha ve the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To resto re the original application, remove the application, and install the application again from the original installation fi le or the back-up copy.
Tools 96 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠The .jar file is required fo r installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it . If there is no access point defined for the application, you are aske d to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufactur er of the application. 1 Open Manager , and scroll to an installation file. Alternatively, search the device memory or a memory card in File mgr. , or open a message in Me ssaging > Inbox that c ontai ns an installation file. Select the applicatio n, and press to start the installation. Tip! While bro wsing, you can download an installation file and inst all it without c losing the connection. 2 Select Options > Install . During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the app lication. To start an installed application, locate it in the menu, and p ress . To start a network connection and to view extra information about the application, sc roll to it, and s elect Options > Go to web address , if available. To see what software packag es have been installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . To send your install ation log to a help desk so that they can see what has been installed or removed, select Options > Send log > Via text message , Via multimedia , Via Bluetooth , or Via e-mail (availa ble only if the co rrect e-mail settings are in place). Remove applications and software Scroll to a software pack age, and select Opt ions > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, y ou can only reinstall it if you have the original software pack age or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents create d with t hat softwar e. Note: If another s oftware package depe nds on the software package tha t you removed, the othe r software package ma y stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details.
Tools 97 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Application settings Select Options > Sett ings and from the following: Software installat ion âÂÂSelect if Symbian software can be installed: On , Signed only , or Off . Online certif. check âÂÂSelect to check the online certificates before in stalling an applicatio n. Default web address âÂÂSet the default address used when checking online certificates. Some Java applications may require a phone call, a message to be sent, or a network connection to a specif ic access point for downloading ex tra data or components. In the Manager main view, scroll to an application, and select Options > Suite settings to change settings related to that specific application. Activation keysâÂÂhandle copyright-protected files Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Press , and select Tools > Activation ke ys to view the digital rights activation ke ys stored in your device: ⢠Valid keys ( ) are connected to one or more media files. ⢠W ith expired keys ( ), you have no time to use the media file, or the time pe riod for using the file is exceeded. To view the Expi red activation keys, pres s . To buy more usage time or extend the usage period for a media file, select an a ctivation key an d Options > Activate content . Activation keys cannot be updated if Web service message reception is disabled. See â Web service messages âÂÂ, p. 54 . To view which keys are not in use at the moment ( Not used ), press twice. Unused activation keys have no media files connected to them saved in the device. To view detailed information such as the validity status and ability to send the file, se lect an activation key, a nd pres s .
Troubleshooting 98 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Troubleshooting Q&A Bluetooth connectivity Q: Why ca nâÂÂt I find my frien dâÂÂs device? A: Check that both devices have activated Bluetooth connectivity. Check that the distance bet ween the two device s is not over 10 metres (32 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Check that the other device is not in hidden mode. Check that both devices are compatible. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end Bluetooth connectivity? A: If another device is connect ed to your device, you can either end the connection usin g the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Pres s , and select Connect. > Bluetooth > Bluet ooth > Off . Multimedia me ssaging Q: What should I do when th e device cannot rec eive a multimedia message because memory is full? A: The amount of me mory needed i s indicated in the error message: Not enough memory to retrieve message. Delete some data first. To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the differe nt data groups consume, press , and select Tools > File mgr. > Options > Memory details . Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging centre. Check th at the setti ngs for multimedia messaging are defined correctly and that ther e are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Q: How can I end the data conne ction when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: To stop the device from making a data connection, press , and select Messaging > Options > Setting s > Multim edia me ssage . To i gnore all incoming multimedia messages, select Multimed ia retrieval > Off . After this change, the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging.
Troubleshooting 99 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact? A: The contact card may not have a phone number o r an e-mail address. Add the missi ng information to the contact card in Contacts . Entries that are saved only on the SIM card are not shown in the contacts directory. To copy contacts from the SIM card to Contacts , see â Copy contacts âÂÂ, p. 18 . Camera Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection window is clean. Calendar Q: Why are the week numbers missing? A: If you have ch anged the calend ar sett ings so that th e week starts on a day other than Monday, the week numbers are not shown. Browser services Q: What do I do if the following message is displaye d: No valid access point define d. Define one in Web settings. ? A: Insert the correct browser se ttings. Contact yo ur service provider for instructions. Log Q: Why does the log appear empt y? A: You may have activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filter have been logged. To see all events, press , and select My own > Log . Scroll to the Log tab, and select Options > Filter > All communication . Q: How do I delete my log information? A: To clear the log, pres s , and select My own > Log . Scroll to the Log tab, and select Options > Clear log . To erase the log contents, recent calls register, and message delivery reports permanently, press , and select My own > Log > Options > Settings > Log durati on > No log . PC connec tivity Q: Why do I have problems in conn ecting the device to my PC? A: Make sure that Nokia PC S uit e is installed and runni ng on your compatible PC. See the user guide for Nokia PC Suite on the CD-ROM. If Nokia PC Su ite is i nstalled and running, you can use Nokia Get connected wiz ard available in Nokia PC Suite to connect to your PC. For further information on how to use Nokia PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia PC Suite or visit the support pages at www.nokia-asia.com.
Troubleshooting 100 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Access codes Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes ? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact yo ur network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for example, a commercial Internet service provider (ISP), service provider, or network operator. Application not resp onding Q: How do I close an application that is no t responding? A: Open the application s witching window by pressing and holding . Then scroll to the application, and press to close the application. Display Q: Why do missing, discoloure d, or bright dots appear on t he screen every time I turn on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Memory l ow Q: What can I do if my device memory is low? A: You can delete the following items regularly to avoid memory gett ing low: ⢠Messages from In box , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messaging ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages from the device memory ⢠Saved browser pages ⢠Images and photos in Galler y To delete contact information, calendar notes , call timers, call cost timers, game scores, or any other data, go to the respective application to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and any of the fol lowing notes are shown: Not enough memory to perform operation . Delete some da ta first. or Memory lo w. Delete so me data. , try deleting items one by one (starting from the smallest item). Q: How can I save my data before deleting it? A: Save your data using one of the following methods: ⢠Use Nokia PC Suite to make a back up copy of all data to a compatible computer . ⢠Send images to your e-mail add ress, and then s ave the images to your computer. ⢠Send data using Bluetooth co nnectivity to a compatible device. ⢠Store data on a compatible memory card.
Battery information 101 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Battery information Charg ing and di sc hargi ng Your device is powered by a recharge able batt ery. The batt ery can be charged and dis c harged hund reds of t ime s, but it w ill event u ally wear out. When th e t a lk and st an dby t imes are not iceably shorte r t h an normal, replace the batt ery. Us e o n ly N o k ia app rove d ba tt er ies, an d re ch arge your batt ery only with Nokia approved char g e rs designated for th is de v ic e . If a replacement bat tery is be ing used for t h e first t ime or if the bat tery has not bee n us ed fo r a prol onge d peri od, i t may be n e cessa ry to co nn ect t h e ch arger and then disconne c t and reconn ect it to begin ch a rging th e ba ttery. Unpl ug the charger from the e lec trical plug and the de v ice when not in us e. Do not le ave a fully charge d batt ery co nn ected to a ch arge r, si nce overc h arging may shorte n its lifeti m e. If left unus e d, a full y charged batte ry will los e it s c h arge ov e r ti me . If the b a ttery i s complet ely di scharged, it may take a fe w mi nutes befo re t h e charging i n dicator appears o n the d isplay or be fore any cal ls can be made . Use the b a ttery o n ly for it s i n te nde d purpose . Never use any c h arger or batt ery th at is damaged. Do n o t sh o rt- ci rc ui t th e b a tte ry. Acci d e nt al sh o rt- ci rcu iti n g can occur when a met a lli c object such as a co in, clip, or pe n causes direct connectio n of th e posi tive ( ) and negat iv e (-) te rminals of the bat tery. (The se look like metal strips on the b a ttery.) This might happe n, for exampl e , w h e n y o u c a rry a sp ar e batt ery in your p o cket or purse. Sho rt-circui ting t h e te rminals may damage the bat t ery or th e connecting object. L e aving the bat tery in hot or cold p laces , s u ch as in a close d car in summer or w int er condit ions , w ill reduce the capacity and li fetime of th e batt ery. Alw a ys try to ke ep th e batt ery b e twe e n 15 ðC an d 25 ðC (5 9 ðF a n d 77ð F ). A device with a hot o r cold bat tery may not work temporarily, e v e n when the b a ttery i s fully charged. Batt ery performance is particularly limi ted in tempe rat ures we ll be low freezing. D o not dis pose of b a tteries in a fire as they may ex plode. Batte ries may als o ex plode if damag e d. Disp ose of batt eries according t o local re gul a tions . P lease recycle when pos sible. Do not dis pose as household waste .
Battery information 102 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia batter y authentication guidelines Alw a ys use original Nokia batt eries for your safety. To check th at you are get ting an origina l Nokia battery, pu rcha se it fr o m an au th orised Nokia dealer, a n d ins p ect the hologram la be l using the foll owing s teps : Succe ssful comp letion of the ste p s is n o t a tota l a ssu ra nce of th e au th e n tic ity o f t h e b a tt e ry. I f y o u h a ve any re as o n to bel ieve th at your batte ry is no t an authent ic, o riginal Nokia battery, you s h ould refrain from us ing it . If aut h e n ticity canno t be verified, ret u rn t h e batt ery to the plac e of purchase. Au th en ticat e h o logram 1 When you look at t h e hologram on th e label, you should see th e Nokia conn ec tin g ha nds s y mbol from one angle and th e Nokia Origin al Enhancements log o when l ook in g from a n other a n gle. 2 When you angl e the holo gram l e ft, right , dow n and up, y o u sh ould see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dot s on eac h side respecti v e ly .
Battery information 103 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. What if yo ur b a tt ery is no t authent ic? If y o u ca nn o t confirm th at you r Nokia battery with the hol ogram on the label is an au th en tic Nokia ba ttery, p lea se do not use the bat tery. T h e use of a batt ery that is not approved by the manufact urer may be d a ngerous and may res u lt in poor performance and damage to y o ur devic e and it s enhancements . It may al so inva lidat e an y a pprov al or wa rrant y ap plyi ng to th e device . To find out more about o riginal Nokia batt eries, v isit www.nok ia -a sia .c o m/ba tterych ec k.
Nokia original enhancements 104 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia original enhancements A new extensive range of enha n c ements is available for your phone. Select the enha ncements which accommodate your specific communication needs. List of compatible enhancements: Audio Fashion Stereo Headset HS-3 Headset HS-5 Stereo Headset HDS-3 Boom Headset HDB-4 Wireless H eadset HDW-3 Wireless Clip-on Headse t HS-21W Wireless Boom H eadset HS-4W Wireless H eadset HS-11W Wireless H eadset HS-36W Wireless H eadset HS-37W Bluetooth Headset BH-800 HS-24W Bluetooth Headset BH-900 HS-25W Wireless H eadset HS-26W Wireless Heads et HS-58W Bluetooth Headset BH-700 HS-57W Bluetooth Headset BH-200 HS-58W Wireless Headset HS-53W, 54W, 55W, 56W Audio Adapter AD-15 Music Stand MD-1 Music Pack MP-256 Inductive Loopset LPS-4 Car Headrest Handsfree BHF-3 Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-3 Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-6W Wireless Car Kit CK-1W Advanced Car Kit CK-7W Universal holder CR-39 Mobile Charger DC-4
Nokia original enhancements 105 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Carrying Carrying Case CP-70 Carrying Case CP-71 Carrying Case CP-69 Multicompatible Case CP-93 Multicompatible Fa shion Ca se CP-109 Cover Non-changeable covers Data Wireless GPS Module LD-1W Wireless GPS Module LD-3W 64 MB Reduced Size MultiMediaCard MU-1 512 MB MMCmobile MU-12 Messaging Wireless Keyboard SU-8W Digital Pen SU-1B Power Travel Charger (ACP-12 update) AC-4 Travel Charger AC-5 Battery Charging Stand DT-14 Some of the e nhancements are described in detail below. For availability of the enhanc ements , please check with your loca l dealer. A few prac tical rules for enhancements operati on: ⢠K eep the enhancements out of small children's reach. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. ⢠Check regularly that all m obile phone equipment in a vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Use only batteries, ch arger s and enhancements approved by the phone manufactur er. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may b e dangerous . Battery # Variation in operation times may occur depending on SIM card, network and usage settings, usage style and environments. Type Tech T alktime# Standby# BL-5C Li-ion Up to 215 mins Up to 260 hours
Nokia original enhancements 106 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia Wireless Boom Headset HS-4W Gain more freedom with the Nokia Wireless Boom Headset. Whether rushing to a meeting or just out for a stroll, you don't have to g o searching th rough yo ur bag or you r coat to take the call. Handsfree convenience make this light, comfortable headset a pleasure to use. It's elegant, comfortable tec hnology finely honed to the needs and rhythms of your li fe, both business and pleasure. Don't mi ss a str ide. ⢠Stylish, comfortable wireless headset ⢠Bluetooth wireless technology ⢠Convenient call handling from the headset ⢠Effortless handsfree functionality ⢠Switches easily from one ear to the other ⢠LED light for status indication Nokia Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-6W Get on the road with the Nokia Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree. This compact unit communicates with your compatible phone via Bluetooth wireless technology within a 10-meter range. âÂÂSpeech trackingâ uses four microphones selecting from 19 di rections to lock on to the direction from which speech is coming and filter out any
Nokia original enhancements 107 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. unwanted background noise coming from other areas. Plus it's easy to install - just plug it in to the vehicle's lighter socket. Key Features: ⢠W ireless connection to compatible phone via Bluetooth technology ⢠Speech tracking technology reduces background noise ⢠Answer and end calls and adjust volume from integrated buttons ⢠One-step installation: plugs in to vehicl e lighter socket ⢠Retractable cable to cha rge your compatible phone on the go Nokia Wireless Keyboard SU-8W Improve your productivity with the Nokia Wireless Keyboard. Write email, text messages, or meeting n otes quickly and easily with a ful l QWERTY keyboard. With a small, foldable, lightweight design, the Nokia Wireless Keyboard is comfortable to ca rry and use, which makes it a perfect tool for your mobile wireless of fice. Key Features: ⢠Foldable, lightweight QWERTY keyboard ⢠Power on/off key plus automatic power-off when folded ⢠S hort-cut keys for mess agi ng and main application menu of compatible phone ⢠Wireless connection to compatib le phone (Bluetooth wireless technology) ⢠3 LED's representing: Power on/off, wireless connection status, bat tery statu s ⢠P owered by 2 x AAA batteries
Care and maintenance 108 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and crafts manship and should be treated with ca re. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic ci rcuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and all ow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or st ore the device in dusty, dirt y areas. Its moving parts and electron ic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of elec tronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temper ature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards . ⢠Do not attem pt to open th e device other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handl ing can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh che micals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clea n any lenses (such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses). ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized ant e nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage th e device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of data you want to keep (such as contacts and calendar notes) before sending your device to a service facility. ⢠To reset the device from time to time for optimum performance, power off the de vice, and remove the battery. Make back-up copies of all important data. All of the above sugg estions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service.
Additional safety information 109 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Additional safety information Your device and its e nhancemen ts may co ntain small par ts. Keep them out of the re ach of sma ll children. Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and alway s switch off yo ur device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positio ns. This device meets RF expos ure guidelines whe n used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm (5/8 inches) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is use d for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and sh ould position the device the above-stated distance from your bo dy. In order to transmit data files or message s, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are follo we d until the transmiss ion is compl eted. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device . Do not plac e credit cards or ot her magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transm itting equipment, including wireless devi ces, may interfer e w ith the functionality of inadequately protected medical devi ces. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your de vice in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care fa cilities may be using equipment that could be sensi tive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufa cturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cm (6 inch es) be maintained betwee n a wireless phone and a pacema ker to avoid potential interference with the pacemake r. These recommendations are consistent with the indepe ndent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should do the following: ⢠Always keep the device more than 15.3 cm (6 inches) from the pacemaker. ⢠Not carry the device in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference.
Additional safety information 110 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. If you suspect interference, swit ch off your device, and move the device away. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provide r. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperl y installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electroni c antiskid (antilock) braking systems, e lectronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your ve hicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device , or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly t hat all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating pro perly. Do not s tore or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, reme mber that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or port able wireless eq uipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly insta lled, and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft , disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive en vironments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphe re, and obey all signs and instruct ions. Potentially expl osive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as ne ar gas pumps at s ervice stations. Observe restrictions on the us e of radio e quipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive at mosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include b elow deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or part icles such as grain, dust, or metal powders.
Additional safety information 111 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this d evice, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the device is not on, swit ch it on. Check for adeq uate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press the end key as many t imes as needed to clear the display and ready th e device for calls. 3 Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numb ers vary by location. 4 Press the call key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can ma ke an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible . Your wireless device may be the only means of comm unication at the scene of an accident. Do not end t he call un til given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) THIS MOBILE DEVICE MEETS GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limit s for expo sure to radio waves recommended by international guideli nes. These guideline s were developed by independent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins design ed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guideline s is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg)* averaged over t en grams of tis sue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be belo w the maximum value because the device is designed to use on ly the power required to reach the network. T hat amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a ne twork base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at t he ear is 0.76 W/kg. Use of device accessories and enhancements ma y result in different SAR values. SAR valu es may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia-asia.com.
112 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Index A Access points 87 settings 88 Activation keys 97 Adding text 28 Alarms alarm clock 3 calendar 60 Applications installing 95 Applications, Java 95 B Backing up 5 Bluetooth 74 connecting two devices, pairing 76 device address 76 factory set passcode 76 headset 94 pairing 76 passcode, glossary explanation 76 security 75 switching off 77 Bookmarks 63 Brightness display 86 setting in camera 25 C Cache, clearing 66 Calendar alarm 59 creating entries 59 synchronising PC Suite 60 Call register See log Calls dialled numbers 14 duration 14 international 11 received 14 settings 86 settings for call divert 93 transferring 14 Camera adjusting bri ghtness 20 , 25 adjusting colour and lighting 23 adjusting flash sett ings 20 edit videos 27 flash 22 image setup settings 20 , 23 modes 23 saving vid eo clips 25 self-timer 22 sending images 1 , 21 sequence mode 21 still image camera settings 22 video recorder settings 26 Cameras 20 CD-ROM 78 Certif icates 91 Chat See instant messaging Clear screen See standby mode Clock 3 alarm 3 settings 3 Codes 90 lock code PIN code 91 PIN2 code 91 security code 91
113 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Computer connections 77 Conference call 11 Connection settings 87 Contact cards storing DTMF tones 14 Contacts 17 inserting images 17 sending 17 Copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory 18 text 43 Copyright protection See activation keys Cutting text 43 D Data conne ctions details 79 ending 78 Date 3 Digital rights management, DRM See activation keys DNS, do main name service, glos sary explanation 89 E Editing videos adding effects 27 adding sound clips 27 adding transitions 27 custom video clips 27 E-mail 44 automatic retrieving 49 offline 50 opening 48 Remote mailbox 47 retrieving from mailbox 48 settings 53 viewing attachments 49 F File formats .jar 96 .sis 95 JAD file 95 JAR file 95 RealOne Player 36 File manager 4 Fixed dialling 18 FM radio 56 G Gallery adding files to album 31 creating new album 31 ordering files in albums 30 , 32 viewing images and videos 30 H Handsfree See loudspeaker Headset settin gs 94 Help application 1 I Instant messaging 70 blocking 71 connecting to a server 70 groups 73 recording messages 72 sending instant messages 71 user ID, glossary ex planation 72 Internet See Web Internet access points (IA P) See access points IP address, glossary ex planation 89 J Java See applications, Java L Lock code 91 Log erasing contents 16 filtering 15
114 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Log duration 16 Loopset settings 94 Loudspeaker 4 M Mailbox 47 automati c retr ieving 49 Media files fast forward 37 file formats 36 mute sound 37 rewind 37 Memory clearing memory 5 , 14, 15 viewing memory consumption 5 Memory card 5 Menu, rearranging 7 Messaging e-mail 44 multimedia messages 44 text messages 44 Modes image modes 24 video modes 24 Movies, muvees custom muvees 38 quick muvees 38 Multimedia messages 44 Music player 68 Mute sound 37 N Nokia original enhancements 10 4 P Packet data connections 78 GPRS, glossary explanation 87 settings 89 Pasting text 43 PC connections via Bluetooth o r USB cable 77 PC Suite calendar data 60 synchronisation 77 transferring images to a PC 29 transferring media files 5 transferring music files to your memory card 36 viewing device memory data 4 Personalisation 9 Phonebook See cont acts PIN code 91 Profiles 8 R Radio 56 Reminder See calendar, alarm Remote mailbox 47 Resolution, glossary expl anation 23 Ringing tones personal ringing tone 19 receiving in a text message 47 S Security code See lock code Sending contact cards, busin ess cards 17 images 1 , 21 video clips 28 Service commands 40 Settings access codes 90 access points 88 Bluetooth connection 75 calendar 60 call barring 93 call diverting 93 certificates 91 data connections 87 date and time 90 display 86 headset 94 IM 70 , 73
115 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. language 85 lock co de 91 loopset 94 original settings 85 Personalising the phone 7 PIN code 91 screen save r 86 Shortcuts 1 SIM card copying names and numbers to device 18 messages 51 names and num bers 18 sis file 95 SMS centre, short message service centr e 51 Snooze 3 Software transferring a file to your device 95 Sound clips 29 Sounds muting a ring ing tone 13 recording sounds 84 Speed dialli ng 12 Standby mode 7 Synchronisation 79 T Text message service centre adding new 51 Text messages 44 Themes 9 Time 3 Transferring content from another devi ce 9 U USB cable 77 USSD commands 40 V Video clips 29 Video player See RealPlayer Visual Radio 56 viewing content 57 visual service ID 57 Voice commands 94 Voice dialling 12 Voice mailbox 11 changing the phone number 11 diverting calls to voice mailbox 93 Voice messages 11 Voice tags 94 making calls 12 Volume control 4 during a call 11 Loudspeaker 4 W Web access points, See access points browser 62 R1140_enIX.fm Page 115 Wedne sday, Februa ry 28, 2007 9:24 AM
Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights re s erved. Nokia Care Online The Nokia Care we b suppor t provid es you w ith m ore infor mation on our on line service s. INTE RA CTIVE D EMONSTR ATI ONS Learn how to set up your phone for the first time , and find out more about its features. Intera ctive Dem onstrations give step-by-step in structi ons on u sing yo ur phone. USERâ S GUID E The online Userâ s Guide c ontains de tailed inform ation on your ph one. Reme mber to c heck regularly for up dates. SOFTWARE Make the most of your phone wit h software fo r your phone and PC. Nokia PC Suite connects your ph one and PC so you c an m anage your ca lendar, c ontacts , music an d image s, while other application s complement its use. SETTINGS Certain ph one fun ctions, such as mul timedia me ssaging , mobile brow sing and ema il*, may require settin gs be fore you can us e them. Have th em sent to your phone f ree of charge. *Not available on all phones . INTERACTIVE DEMONST RATIONS SOFTWARE USER âÂÂS GU ID E SETTINGS
Copyright é 2 006 Nokia. A ll rights rese rved. HOW DO I USE MY PHONE ? The Set U p secti on, at www.nokia-asia.com/setup , helps y ou prepare yo ur phone for use . Familiarise yo urself with phone functions and featu res by refer ring to the Guides and Demos s ection at www.nokia-asia.com/guides . HOW DO I SYNCHRON ISE MY PHONE AND PC? Connecting your phon e to a compatible PC with the requisite Nokia PC Suite v ersion from www.nokia-asia.com/pcsuite lets yo u sy nchr on ise your cal enda r a nd co nt act s. WHERE CAN I GET SOFTWARE FOR M Y PHONE? Get more ou t of your phone with downloads fr om the Software section at www.n okia-asia.co m/softwa re . WHERE CAN I FIND ANSWERS TO COMMON QUESTIONS? Look up the FAQ section at www.nokia-asia.com/faq for answers to your questions on y our phone and other Nokia products and serv ic es. HOW DO I KEEP UP WIT H NOKIA NE WS? Subscribe online at www.nokia- asia.com/signup an d be the fir st to know about the latest products and promotions. Sign up for "Nokia Connecti ons" to rec eive monthl y updates on latest phones and technology. Sign up fo r "Be The Firs t To Know" to get exclusi ve previews of new phone announcements or subscribe to "Promo tional Communications" for upcoming events. Should you still require further assistance, please ref er to www.n okia-as ia.com/con tactus . For addition al informati on on repair serv ices, ple ase visit www.nokia-asia.com/repair . Please visit your own coun try site for mor e details: Australia and New Zealand ww w.noki a.co m.au/ suppo rt Malay sia www.n okia.c om.my/s uppo rt Indi a ww w.noki a.co .in/sup port Phili ppin es www.no kia.com .ph/s uppo rt Indo nesi a ww w.nokia .co.id /support Si ng apo re www.no kia.com .sg/su pport Jap an ww w.nokia .co.jp /support Th ai lan d www.no kia.co.th /suppo rt If your countr y is not listed above, ple ase visit www.n okia-asia. com/s uppo rt .
i Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights re served . DECLARA TION OF CONF ORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION, declares that this RM-180 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformit y/. Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, distribution or s torage of pa rt or all of the cont ents in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Connec ting People, Pop-Port, and Vis ual Radio are trademarks or registered trademar ks of Nokia Corporat ion. Other product and company names mentioned herein ma y be trademarks or tra denames of their respe ctive owners. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. This product includes software licensed f rom Symbian Software Ltd é 1998-2006. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademar ks of Symbian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java- based marks are t rademarks or registe red trademarks of Sun Micros ystems, In c. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Stac î, LZS î, é1996, Stac, Inc., é1994-1996 Microsoft Corporation. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Hi/fn î, LZS î,é1988-98, Hi/fn. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Ot her patents pending. Part of the software in this product is é Copy right ANT Ltd. 1998. All rightsreserved. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patent s. T9 text input s oftware Copyright é1997-2006 Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG -4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercia l use in connection wit h information which has been encoded in compliance wit h the MPEG-4 Visual Standar d by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncommerci al activity and (ii) for use in connection w ith MPEG-4 video p rovided by a licensed video pr ovider. No lic ense is grante d or shall be implied for any other use. Additiona l information, including that related to promotional, internal, and comme rcial uses, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegl a.com. Nokia o perates a policy of ongoing development. N okia reserves the right t o make changes and improve ments to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nok ia be responsible for any loss of data or inc ome or any special, incidental, consequent ia l or indirect damages howso ever caused. The contents of t his document are pr ovided âÂÂas isâÂÂ. E xcept as re quired by applicable law, no warranties of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warr anties of merchantability and f itness for a particular purpose, are made in r elation to the acc uracy, reliability or content s of this document . Nokia reserves the right to revise this doc ument or withdraw it at any time wit hout prior notice. The availability of par ticular product s may vary by region. Please c heck with the Nokia dealer nea rest to you. This device may c ontain commodities, technol ogy, or software subje ct to export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Divers ion contrary to law is prohibited. 0434 leg al-i n f orm ati on1 .fm Pag e i T u esday, F ebruar y 27, 2007 7: 5 6 PM
ii Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contents For your safety .... .............................. ..... vii Get connected ............................ .............. x Your Nokia N72 ......................... .............. 1 Help ............. ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... .. 1 Tutorial .............. ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ...... ..... 1 Useful short cuts .............. ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 1 Clock... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ...... .......... ......... .. 3 Clock settings .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 3 World clock........ ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... .. 3 Volume and loudspeake r control ... ......... ......... ......... ..... 4 File manager ........... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 4 View memory consumption ................ .......... ......... .. 5 Memory lowâÂÂfree memory ............. ......... ........... ..... 5 Memory card tool ........... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... 5 Format a memory card .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... 6 Personalise your device ........................... 7 ProfilesâÂÂset tone s ............ ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... 8 Offline profile...... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... 8 Transfer content from another device............... ........... 9 Change the look of your device .. ............ .................. ......9 Active standby mode....... ........... .............................. ....... 10 Make calls .......................... .................... 11 Calls .......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ...... ... 11 Make a confere nce call.... ......... ....... ......... ......... ..... 11 Speed dial a phone numbe r ....... ......... .......... ......... 12 Voice dialing ......... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ... 12 Answer or reject a call ........... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... 13 Call waiting ........... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ... 13 Options during a call .... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... 14 Log ............. ....... ......... ...... .......... ...... ......... ....... ......... ......... ... 14 Recent calls ...... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... 14 Call duration .............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ..... 14 Packet data ..... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ...... ... 15 Monitor all communication events ..................... 15 Contacts (Phonebook) ........................... 17 Save names and numbers ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... ... 17 Default numbers and addres ses .................. ......... 17 Copy contacts ............ ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ..... 18 SIM directory and other SIM s ervices .... ......... ... 18
iii Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Add ringing tones for contact s ................. ......... ......... .. 19 Create contact groups........ ......... ......... ......... ......... .........19 Remove members from a group .................. .........19 Camera and Gallery ..................... ......... 20 Camera ........ ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......20 Take pictures ............ ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... .. 20 Take pictures in a sequence ............. ......... ......... ....21 You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer........... ......... ......... .. 22 The flash .............. ......... ....... ......... ...... ......... ....... .........22 Adjust still image camera se ttings ......... ......... .... 22 Adjust color and lighting ...... .................. .......... ...... 23 Shooting modes ........... ........... .................. .......... ...... 23 Edit images ............... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... .........24 Record videos ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .........25 Edit video clips ........... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....27 Gallery.......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......29 View images and video clips..... ........... ............ ......29 Slide show ........... ...................... .................. .......... ...... 30 Albums .............. ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 30 PrintOnline ............ ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .... 31 Online sharing.... ...... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... .........32 Imaging ................................. ................. 35 Image prin t ........ ......... ...... .......... ...... ......... ....... ......... ....... .. 35 Printer selection ...... .......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......35 Print preview............ ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... 35 Print settings ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... 35 RealPlayer ....... ............ ...................... .................. .......... ...... 36 Play video or sound clips ......... ...................... ......... 36 Create a tra ck list .......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... .. 36 Stream content over t he air ............ ......... ......... .... 37 Receive Re alPlayer se ttings ........ ......... ......... ....... .. 37 Movie director ............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... .... 38 Create a qu ick muvee .......... ......... ....... ......... ....... .... 38 Create a cust om muvee ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... .. 38 Messaging ............................. ................. 40 Write text .......... ...... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... .. 41 Traditional text input . ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... .. 41 Predictive tex t inputâÂÂdictionary ....... ......... ......... 41 Copy text to clipboard .......... .................. .......... ...... 43 Write and send mes sages ............... ...... ......... .......... ...... 43 Receive MMS and e-mail se ttings............ ........... 45 InboxâÂÂrecei ve messages .......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .... 46 Multimedia me ssages............ ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 46 Data and se ttings . ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .. 46 Web service me ssages.............. ......... ......... ....... ...... 47 My folders ............ ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... .... 47 Mailbox ........... ............ ............................... ......... ................ 47 Open the mailbox ........ ........... .................. ................ 48 Retrieve e-mail messa ges ......... ......... ......... ......... .. 48
iv Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Delete e-mail me ssages ... ......... ......... ......... ......... ... 49 Disconnect from the mailbox ........... ......... ......... ... 50 OutboxâÂÂmessage s waitin g to be se nt ................ ....... 50 View message s on a SIM card ............... ......... ....... ....... 51 Messaging settings ............ ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ... 51 Text message s .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 51 Multimedia messages ................ ......... ....... ......... ..... 52 E-mail............. ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 53 Web servic e messa ges ............. ......... ....... ......... ....... 54 Cell broadcast ... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ....... 54 Other settings .............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ... 55 Radio ............ ....................... ................... 56 Listen to the ra dio .............. ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... ... 56 View visual content ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 57 Saved stat ions .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ....... 57 Settings ............... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... 58 Calendar.............................. ................... 59 Create calendar entries..... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 59 Set a calendar alarm.............. ......... ......... ....... ......... 60 Calendar vie ws ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 60 Delete calendar entries ........ ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... 60 Calendar s ettings................ ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ..... 61 Web ..................... ............................... .....62 Access the Web ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ..... 62 Receive brows er se ttings.......... ......... ......... ....... ..... 62 Enter the settings ma nually ........... ......... ......... ..... 62 Bookmarks view.............. ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 63 Add bookmarks manually ......... ........... ............ ....... 63 Send bookmarks ........ ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 63 Make a conn ection .......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ....... 63 Connection security ................. ....... ......... ......... ....... 64 Browse............. ......... ...... .......... ...... ......... ....... ......... ....... ..... 64 View saved pa ges ............ ......... ......... ......... ....... ....... 65 Download an d purchase items .............. ......... ......... ..... 65 End a connection ............. ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ..... 66 Empty the cache ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ....... 66 Web settings........... ...... .......... ......... ...... ......... .......... ...... ... 66 My own ...................................... ............. 68 Games .............. ...... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ..... 68 Music play er ........... ......... ....... ......... ...... ......... .......... ...... ... 68 Play music ........... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ..... 68 Playlists .............. ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 69 Go toâÂÂadd shortcuts.............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 69 Delete a shortcut ............. ......... ......... ......... ....... ....... 69
v Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. IMâÂÂinstant me ssaging (chat) ................. ......... ......... .... 70 Receive IM settings ................ ....... ......... ......... .........70 Connect to a n IM server ....... ......... ......... .......... ......70 Modify your IM settings ....... .................. .......... ...... 70 Search for IM groups and us ers ........ ........... .........71 Join and leave a n IM group .......... ......... .......... ......71 Chat ........ ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......71 View and sta rt conversations ... ......... ......... ......... .. 72 IM contact s . ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ...... .......... ......72 Manage IM groups ............. ......... ......... ......... ....... .... 73 Chat server sett ings ......... ......... ...... ......... .......... ......73 Connectivity .. ............................... ......... 74 Bluetooth conne ctivity ........... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......74 Bluetooth connectivity settings .................. .........75 Send data using Bluetoot h connectivity ............75 Pair devices ........... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....76 Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity....... 77 Switch off Bluetooth conn ectivity.............. .........77 PC connections.......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .... 77 CD-ROM ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....78 Your device as a mode m .......... ...................... ......... 78 Connection ma nager .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .. 78 View data connection de tails .......... ........... ......... .. 79 Remote synch ronisation............. ....... ......... ......... ......... .. 79 Create a new sync hronisation profile ............... .. 79 Synchronise da ta ........... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... 80 Device manager .......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .... 81 Server profile settings ................ ......... ......... ......... .. 81 Office ............. ....................... ................. 82 Calculator .......... ...... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... .. 82 Converter ........... ...... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 82 Set base currenc y and exchange ra tes ............... 83 To-do............ ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ...... .......... ...... 8 3 Notes.......... ...... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... .... 84 Recorder ............... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ...... 8 4 Tools ...................... ............................... .. 85 Settings .............. ......... ......... ....... ......... ...... ......... ....... ......... 85 Phone settings ................ ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... .. 85 Call settings ................ ....... ......... ...... ......... .......... ...... 86 Connection settings .................. ...... ......... .......... ...... 87 Date and time ............... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... .... 90 Security .......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... .... 90 Call diverting .............. ....... ......... ...... ......... ....... ......... 93 Call barring ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ...... 9 3 Network ........ ....... ......... ....... ......... ...... ......... ....... ......... 93 Enhancement se ttings........... ......... ......... ....... ......... 9 4
vi Copyright é 2 006 Nokia. A ll rights rese rved. Voice comm ands ...... ........ ....... ....... .... ....... ....... ....... ....... ... 94 Application ma nager ...... ....... ... ........ ....... ....... ....... .... ...... 9 5 Install a pplications a nd so ftware . ....... ....... .... ...... 9 5 Remove a pplications a nd softwa re .... ....... ....... ... 9 6 Application settings ... ....... .... ....... ....... ....... ........ ... ... 9 7 Activation keysâÂÂhandle copyright-pro tected f iles . ....... .... ....... ....... ....... ........ ... ... 97 Troubleshooting .................................... 98 Q&A . ... ........ ....... ....... ....... .... ....... ....... ....... ....... .... ....... ....... ... 98 Battery information ........ ................... 101 Chargin g and dis charging .... ....... ....... ....... .... ....... ....... 10 1 Nokia batte ry authen tication guideline s .. ....... ....... 10 Nokia original enhanceme nts ........ .... 104 Battery ....... ... ....... ....... ........ ... ....... ........ ....... ....... ... ........ ... 105 Nokia Wireless Boom Heads et HS-4W ...... ....... ....... 106 Nokia Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-6W .. ... 106 Nokia Wireless Keyboard SU-8W ..... .... ....... ....... ....... 107 Care and mainte nance .... ................... 108 Additional safety information ....... .... 109 Index ................................. ............... .... 112 R1140_enT OC.fm Page v i Tuesday , Febru ary 27, 2007 7: 43 PM 2
vii Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete us er guide for further in forma tion. SWITCH ON SAF ELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interfer ence or danger. ROAD SAFETY COME S FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFEREN CE All wireless devices ma y be susceptible to interferenc e, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireles s devices can ca use interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELIN G Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device wher e blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIF IED SER VICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair t his product. ENHANCEM ENTS AN D BATTERIE S Use only approved enhancements and bat teries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTA NCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information.
viii Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. CONNECTING TO OT HER DEVICES When connecting to any o ther devic e, read it s user guide for detailed s afety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGE NCY CALLS Ensure the phone function of the device is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the start screen. Enter the emergency nu mber, then press the call k ey. Give your loca tion. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wirel ess dev ice des cribe d in this guide is approved for use on the EGSM 900/1800/1900 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws, and respect privacy and legitimate right s of others. When taking and using images or video clips, obey all laws, and respec t local customs as we ll as privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this devic e, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wire less device use may cause interference or danger. Network servic es To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of th e features in this device depend on features in the wi reless network to function. These network services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilize network services. Your service provid er may need to give you additional instructions for th eir use and explain what charges will apply. Some netw orks may have l imitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent characters an d services . Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially configur ed. This configuration may include cha nges in menu names, menu order, and icons. Cont act your servic e provider for more i nformation.
ix Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) t hat run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, e-mail and content downloading using the browser or over MMS, require network support for these technologies. For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendo r. This may be the service provider, network operator, or other vendor. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device off, and disc onnect the charg er before remov ing the battery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from a DC-4, AC-3, and AC-4 charger, and from an AC-1, ACP-8, ACP- 9, ACP-12, LCH-8, LCH-9, or LCH-12 charge r when used with the CA-44 charger adapter. The battery in tended for use with this device is BL-5C. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The us e of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty and may be dangerous. For availability of ap proved enhancements, pleas e check with your deal er. When you dis connec t the po wer cor d of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
x Copyright é 2 006 Nokia. A ll rights rese rved. Get connected Use your device on t he 2G ne twork. Se e â About you r device âÂÂ, p. vi ii . Use Bluetooth t echnolo gy to transfer files and conne ct to compa tible enha nceme nts. See â Bluetooth conn ectivit y âÂÂ, p. 74 . Use a compa tible USB data cable, for instan ce th e Nokia Connectivity Cable CA-53, t o connect to compatible devices, such as printers and PCs. U s e a c o m p a t i b l e m e m o r y c a r d t o t r an s f e r d a t a o r b a c k u p infor mation. See â Memory card tool âÂÂ, p. 5 . Get_conn ected.fm Pag e x Tu esday, Febr uary 27, 2007 8:55 PM
Your Nokia N72 1 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N72 Model number: Nokia N72-5 Hereinafter referre d to as Nokia N72. Help Your device has context-sensiti ve help. You can access the help from an application or from the main menu. When an application is open, to access help for the curren t view, select Options > Help . Example: To view instructions on how to create a contact card, star t to create a contact card, and select Option s > Help . When you ar e reading th e instructi ons, to switch between help and the application that is open in the background, press and hold . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Help . Select the desired application to view a lis t of help topics. To search for help topics using keywords, select Options > Search by keyword . When you are reading a help topic, to view other related topics, press or . Tutorial The tutorial gives you information about some of the features of your device. To view the tutorial, insert the memory card into your device, press , and select My own > Tutorial and the section yo u want to view. Useful shortcuts Use shortcuts to quickly get the most from your device. Refer to the relevant sections in this user guide for further details of the functions. Take pictures ⢠To adjust image setup settings before taking a picture, pres s . ⢠After taking a picture, to send the image, press and select Via multimedia , Vi a e-mail , or Via Bluetooth . For more information, see â Messaging âÂÂ, p. 40 and â Bluetooth connectivity âÂÂ, p. 74 . ⢠To delete an image, press .
Your Nokia N72 2 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠To take a new picture, p ress or the camera capture key. Record video clips ⢠To adjust video setup settings before recording video, press . ⢠After recording a video clip, to send the video, press and select Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth . You cannot send video clips saved in the mp4 format in a multimedia message. For more information, see â Messaging âÂÂ, p. 40 and â Bluetooth connect ivity âÂÂ, p. 74 . ⢠To delete a video clip, press . Edit text and lists ⢠To mark an item in a list, scro ll to it, and press and at the same time. ⢠To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold while you press or . To end the selection, release , then release . ⢠To copy and paste text: To select letters and words, press and hold . At the same time, press or . As the selection moves , text is highlighted. To copy the text to clipboard, while still holding , select Copy . To insert the text into a document, press and hold , and select Paste . Standby mode ⢠To switch between applications that are open, press and hold . If memory is low, the device may close some applications . The device saves any unsav ed data before closing an application. Leaving applications r unning in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. ⢠To change the profile, pres s , and select a profile. ⢠To switch between General and Silent profiles, press and hold . If you have two phone lines, this action switches between the two lines. ⢠To open the last dialled numbers list, press . ⢠To use voice commands, press and hold . ⢠To start a connection to Web , press and hold . See â Web âÂÂ, p. 62 . For furthe r shortcut s availa ble in the standby mode, see â Active standby mode âÂÂ, p. 10 . Keypad lock (keyguard) ⢠To lock: In the standby mode, press , then . ⢠To unlock: Press , then . ⢠To turn on the display light when the keypad lock is on, press . When the keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device.
Your Nokia N72 3 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Clock Press , and select Clock . To set a new alar m, select Options > Set al arm . Enter the alarm time, and select OK . When the alar m is active, is shown. To turn off the alarm, select Stop . When th e alarm tone sounds, select Snooze to stop the alarm for five minutes, after which it resumes. You can do this a maximum of five times. If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop , the device as ks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. To cancel an alarm, select Clo ck > Options > Remove alarm . Clock settings To chang e the cloc k setti ngs, select Options > Sett ings in the clock. To change the time or date, select Time or Date . To change the clock shown in the standby mode, scro ll down, and sele ct Clock ty pe > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone network to update the time, date, and time zone information to your device (network service), scroll down, and select Au to time update . For the Auto time update setting to take effect, the device restarts. To change the alarm tone, sc roll down, and select Clock alar m tone . To change the daylight-saving time status, scroll down, and select Daylight-saving . Select On to add 1 hour to the My current city time. See â World clock âÂÂ, p. 3 . When the daylight-saving is active, is shown in the clock main view. This setting is not shown if Auto ti me update is on. World clock Open Clock , and press to open the world clock view. In the world clock view, you can view th e time in different cities. To add cities to the list, s elect Options > Add city . Enter the first letters of the city name. The search field appears automatically, and the matching cities are displayed. Select a cit y. You ca n add a maximum of 15 cities to the list.
Your Nokia N72 4 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To set your current city, scroll to a city, and select Options > My current city . The city is displayed in the clock main vi ew, and the time in your devi ce is changed according to the city select ed. Check that the time is correct and matches your time zone. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the volume level when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, press or . The built-in loudspeaker allows you to sp eak and listen from a short distance without ha ving to hol d the device to your ear. Sound applications use the loudspeaker by default. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeaker during a call, start a call, and select Options > Activate lou dsp. . To turn off the loudspeaker when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, select Options > Activate handset . File manager Many features of the device use memory to store data . These features inclu de contac ts, messages, images, ringing tones, calendar and to-do notes, documents, and downloaded applications. The free memory available depends on how much data is already sa ved in the device memory. You can use a compatible memory card as extra storage space. Memory cards ar e rewritable, so you can delete and save data on a memory card. To browse files and folders in the device memory o r on a compatible memory card (if inserted), press , and select Tools > File mgr. . The device memory view ( ) opens. Press to open the memory card view ( ). To move or copy files to a folder, press and at the same time to mark a file, and select Options > Move to folder or Copy to folder . To find a file, s elect Options > Fi nd and the memory from which to search, and enter a search text that matc hes the file name. Tip! You can use Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite to view the different memories in your device. See the CD-ROM supplied with your dev ice.
Your Nokia N72 5 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. View memory consumption To view what types of data you have in the device and how much memory the differen t data types consume , select Option s > Memory detai ls > Phone memory . Scroll down to Fre e memory to view the amount of free memory in the device. To view the amou nt of free memory on a memor y card, if you have a compatible card inserted in the device, select Option s > Memory details > Memory card . Scro ll down to Free memory to view the amount of free memory on the memory card. Memory lowâÂÂfree memory The device notifies you if the device memory or memory card memory is getting low. To free device memory, transfer data to a compatible memory card in the file manage r. Mark files to be moved, select Options > Move to fol der > Memory card , and a folder. Tip! To free memory from the device or from a memory card, use Image Store available in Nokia PC Suite to transfer images and video clips to a compatible PC. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. To remove data to free memory, use File mgr. , or go to the respective application. For example, you can remove the following: ⢠Message s from I n box , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messagin g ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages f rom the device memory ⢠Saved Web pages ⢠Saved images, videos, or sound files ⢠Conta ct information â¢C a l e n d a r n o t e s ⢠Downloaded applications. See also â Appli cation manager âÂÂ, p. 95 . ⢠Any other data that you no longer need Memory card tool Note: This device uses a Reduced Size Dual Voltage (1.8 or 3V) MultiMediaCard (RS-M MC). To ensure interoperability, use only dual voltage RS-MMCs. Check the compatibility of an RS-MMC with its manufacturer or provider. Use only Reduced Size MultiMediaCards (RS-MMC) approved by Nokia for us e with this device. Nok ia utilizes the approved industry st andards for memory car ds but not all other brands may function correctly or be fully compatible with this device.
Your Nokia N72 6 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Press , and select Tools > Memory . You can use a compatible memory ca rd as extra stor age space. It is a lso good to regularly b ack up th e information in the device memory to a memory card. The in formation can be restored to the device later. You cannot use the memory card if the door of the memory card slo t is open . Important: Do not remove the memory card in the middle of an operation when the card is being accessed. Removing the card in the middle of an operation may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stor ed on the card may be corrupte d. To back up informa tion from device memory to a compatible memory card, select Options > Backup phone mem. . To restore in formation from a compatible memory card to the device memory, select Option s > Restore from card . Tip! To rename a memory card, select Options > Memory card name . Format a memory card When a memory card is reformatted, all da ta on the card is permanently lost. Some memory cards are supplie d preformatted and others require forma tting. Co nsult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory ca rd before you ca n use it. To forma t a mem ory card , select Options > Format mem. card . Select Yes to confirm. When formatting is complete, enter a name for the memory card, and select OK .
Personalise your device 7 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your device Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain featur es be di sabled or not a ctivated in yo ur devic e. If so , they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially co nfigured for your network provider. This configuration may include changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more in formation . ⢠To use the standby display for fast access to your most frequently used applications, see â Active sta ndby mode âÂÂ, p. 10 . ⢠To change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the power saver, see â Change the look of your device âÂÂ, p. 9 . ⢠To customise the ringing tones, see â ProfilesâÂÂset tones âÂÂ, p. 8 . ⢠To change the shortcuts assigned for the different presses of the scroll key and left and right selection keys in the standby mode, see â Standby mode âÂÂ, p. 85 . The scroll key shor tcuts are not available if the active standby is on. ⢠To change the clock shown in the standby mode, press , and sel ect Clock > Options > Se ttings > Clock type > Analogue or Digital . ⢠To change the clock alarm tone, press , and select Clock > Options > Settings > Clock Alarm t one an d a tone. ⢠To change the ca lendar alarm ton e, press , and select Calendar > Options > Settin gs > Calendar alarm tone and a tone. ⢠To change the welcome note to a text or an image, press , and select Tools > Sett ings > Phone > General > Welcome note or logo . ⢠To assign an individual ringing tone to a contact, press , and sel ect Cont acts . See â Add ringing tones for contacts âÂÂ, p. 19 . ⢠To assign a speed dial to a contact, press a number key in the standby mode ( is reserved for the voice mailbox), and press . Select Yes , then select a contact. ⢠To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folder . You can move less used applications into folders, and place applications that you use more often into the main menu.
Personalise your device 8 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. ProfilesâÂÂset tones To set and customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environme nts, or caller groups, press , and select Tools > Profile s . If the currently selected profile is other than General , the profile name is shown at the t op of the display in the standby mode. To change the profile, pre ss in the standby mode. Scroll to t he profile you wa nt to ac tivate, and select OK . To modify a profile, press , and select Tools > Profiles . Scroll to t he profile, and select Options > Personalise . Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the choices. Tones stored on a memory card are indicated with . You can sc roll through the tone list and listen to each one before you make your selection. Press any key to stop the sound. Tip! In the list of tones, Tone downloads opens a list of bookmarks. You can sele ct a bookmark and start connection to a Web page to download tones. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new . Offline profile The Offlin e profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless network. When you activate the Offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area. All wireless ph one signals to and from the device are prevented. If you try to send messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. Warning: In the offline profil e you cannot make or receive any calls, except make ca lls to certain emergency numbers, or use other features that require network coverage. To make ca lls, you must first activate the phone function by changing profiles. If the device ha s been locked, enter the lock code. Warning: Your device must be switc hed on to use Offline profile. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. To leave the Offline profile, press , and select another profile. The device re-enabl es wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient si gnal strength ). If Bluetooth connectivity is activated before entering the Offline profile, it will be deactivated. Bluetooth connectivity is automatically reactivated after leaving the Offline profile. See â Bluetooth connectiv ity setting s âÂÂ, p. 75 .
Personalise your device 9 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Transfer content from another device You can copy cont acts, calendar, imag es, video, and sound clips using Bluetooth connectivity, from a compatible Nokia Series 60 device. You can use your Nokia N72 without a SIM card. The offline profile is au tomatically activated when the device is switched on without a SIM card. This allows you to use the SIM card in another device. To avoid duplicate entries, yo u can transfer the same type of information (for example , contacts) from the other device to your Nokia N72 only once. Before star ting the transfer, you must ac tivate Blu etooth connectivity on both devices. On each device, press , and select Connect. > Bluetooth . Select Bluetooth > On . Give a name to each device. To transfer content: 1 Press , and select Tools > Transfer on your Nokia N72. Follow the instru ctions on the screen. 2 The device searches for other devices with Bluetooth connectivity. When it ha s finished t he search, select your other device from the list. 3 You are asked to enter a cod e on your Nokia N72. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and sel ect OK . En t er the same code on the other device, and select OK . 4 The Tran sfer application is sent to the other device as a message. 5 Open the message to install Transfer on the other device, and follow the instructions on the screen. 6 From your Nokia N72, select the content you wa nt to copy from the other device. Content is copied from the memory and memory card of the other device to your Nokia N72 and memory card. Copying time depends on th e amount of data to be transferred. You can cancel copying and continue later. The Transfer application is add ed to the main menu of the other dev ice. Change the look of your device To change the look of the di splay, such as the wallpaper and icons, press , and select Tools > Themes . The active theme is indicated by . In Themes you can group together elements from other themes or select images from the Gallery to personalise theme s further. The themes on the memory card are indicated by . Th e themes on the memory card are not a vaila ble if the memory card is not inserted in the device. I f you want to use the themes saved in the memory card withou t the memory card, save the themes in the device memory first.
Personalise your device 10 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To open a browser connection and download more themes, select The me downloads . To activate a theme, scroll to it, and select Options > Apply . To preview a theme, scroll to it, and select Options > Preview . To edit themes, scroll to a theme, and select Optio ns > Edit to change the following options: Wallpaper âÂÂThe image to be shown as a background image in the standby mode. Power saver âÂÂThe power saver type on the display: date and time, or a text you ha ve written yourself. See also â Display âÂÂ, p. 86. Image in 'Go to' âÂÂTh e background image for the Go to application. To restore the selected theme back to its original settings, select Op tions > Restore orig. theme when you edit a theme. Active standby mod e Use your standby display for fast access to your most frequently used applications . By default, the active standby mode is on. Press , select Tools > Settings > Phone > Standby mode > Active standb y , and press to switch the active standby on or off. The active standby display is shown with default applications acros s the top of the screen. Scroll to an application or event, and press . The standard scroll key shortcuts available in the standby mode cannot be used when the active standby mode is on. To change the default appli cations shortcuts: 1 Press , select Tools > Settings > Phone > Standby mode > Active standby apps. , and press . 2 Highlight a shortcut to an application, and select Options > Ch ange . 3 Select a new application fr om the list, and press . Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you are not able to change them.
Make calls 11 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls Calls Tip! To increase or decrease the volume during a call, pres s or . If you have set the volume to Mute , you cannot adjust the volume with the scroll key. To a djust th e volume , select Unmute , and press or . 1 In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. Press to remove a number. For international calls, p ress twice for the character (replaces the inte rnational access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Press to cal l the number. 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Pressing always ends a call, even if another application is active. To make a call from Contacts , pr ess , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name; or enter the first letters of the name to the sear ch field. Matching contacts are listed. Press to call. Select the call type Voice call . You must copy the contacts from your SIM car d to Contacts before yo u can make a call this way. See â Copy contacts âÂÂ, p. 18 . To call your voice mailbox (n etwork service), press and hold in the standby mode. See also â Call diverting âÂÂ, p. 93 . Tip! To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, press , and select Tools > Voice mail > Options > Change numbe r . Enter the number (obtained from your service provider), and select OK . To call a recently dialed number in the standby mode, press to access a list of the 20 last numbers you called or attempted to call. Scroll to the number yo u want, and press to call the number. Make a conference call 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Options > New call . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first partic ipant in the conf erence ca ll, se lect Options > Conference .
Make calls 12 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Options > Conference > Add to conference . The device supports conf erence call s between a maximum of six participan ts, including yourself. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select Option s > Conference > Pri vate . Select a participant, and select Private . The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still cont inue the conference call. After you finish the private conversation, select Options > Add to conference to return to the conference ca ll. To drop a participant, select Option s > Conference > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conference call, press . Speed dial a phone number To activate speed dialing, press , and select Tools > Settings > Call > Speed dialling > On . To assign a phone number to on e of the speed dialing keys (âÂÂ) , p r e s s , a n d s e l e c t Tools > Speed dial . Scroll to the key to whi ch you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . is reser ved for the voice mailbox. To call in the standby mode, press the speed dial key and . Voice dialing Your device supports enhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not dependent on the speakerâÂÂs voice, so the user does not r ecord voice tags in advance. Instead, the device creates a voice tag for the entries in contacts, and compares the spoken voice tag to it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognize the voice commands better. The voice tag for a contac t is the name or ni ckname that is saved on the contact card. To listen to the synthesized voice tag, open a contact card , and select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be diffi cult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. When you use voice dialing, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a short dist ance away when you say the voice tag.
Make calls 13 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1 To start voice d ialing, press and hold . If you are using a compatible headset with the headset key, press and hold the headset key to start voice dialing. 2 A short tone is played, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name or nickna me that is save d on the contact card. 3 The device plays a synthesized voice tag for the recognized contac t in the selected device langua ge, and displays the name and number. After a time-out of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognized contact was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches, or Quit to cancel voice dialing. If several numbers are saved under the name, the device selects the default number, if it has been set. Otherwise the device selects the first available number of the following: Mobile , Mobile (home ) , Mobile (business) , Teleph one , Tel. (home) , and Tel. (b usiness) . Answer or reject a call To answer the call, press . To mute the ringing tone when a call comes in, select Silence . Tip! If a compatible headset is connected to the device, to answer and end a call, press the headset key. If you do not wa nt to answer a call, press to reject it. The caller hears a line bu sy tone. If you have activated the Call divert sett ings > Voice calls > If busy func tion to divert calls, rejecting an incoming call als o diverts the call. See â Call diverting âÂÂ, p. 93 . When you reject an incoming call, you can also se nd a text message to the caller informing why you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send text message . You can edit the text before sending it. See also Reject call with SMS , p. 86 . Call waiting You can answer a call while you have another call in progress if you have activated Call waiting (network service) in Tools > Settin gs > Call > Call waiting . Tip! To chang e the device to nes for different environments and events (for example, wh en you want your device to be sile nt), see â ProfilesâÂÂset tones âÂÂ, p. 8 . To answer the waiting call, press . The first call is put on hold.
Make calls 14 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To switch bet ween the two cal ls, select Swap . Select Options > Transfer t o connect an incoming call or a call o n h o l d w i t h a n a c t i v e c a l l a n d t o d i s c o n n e c t y o u r s e l f f r o m the calls. To end the active call, press . To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Options during a call Many of the options that you can use during a call are network services. Select Options during a call for some of the following options: Mute or Unm ute , Answe r , Reject , Swap , Hold or Un hold , Act ivate handset , A ctivate loudsp. , or Activate handsfree (if a compatible headset with Bluetooth connec tivity is attached), End active call or End all calls , New call , Conference , and Transfer. Select from the following: Replace âÂÂto end an active call and replace it by answering the waiti ng call. Send DTMF âÂÂto send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password). Enter th e DTMF string or search f or it in Contacts . To enter a wait chara cter ( w ) or a pause characte r ( p ), press repeatedly. Select OK to s en d t he tone. Tip! You can add DTMF t ones to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a co ntact car d. Log Recent calls To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dialed calls, press , and select My own > Log > Recent calls . The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. Tip! When you see a note in th e standby mode about missed calls, select Show to access the list of missed calls. To call back, scroll to a name or number, and press . To clear all rece nt call lists, select Option s > Clear recent calls in the recent calls main view. To clear one of the call registers, open the register you want to erase, and select Options > Cle ar list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and press . Call duration To monitor the approximate dura tion of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select My own > Log > Call duration .
Make calls 15 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Options > Clear timers . For this you need the lock code. See â Security âÂÂ, â Phone and SIM âÂÂ, p. 90. Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connections, press , and select My own > Log > Pack et data . For example, you may be charged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Icons in Log : Incoming Outgoing Missed communication events To monitor all voice and video calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the device, press , select My own > Log , and press the scroll key to the right to open the general l og. For each communication event, you can see the sender or recipient name, phone number, n ame of the service provider, or access point. You can filter the general log to view just one type of event and create new contact cards based on the log information. Tip! If y ou want to see the duration of a voice call on the main display during an active call, select Opt ions > Settings > Show call duration > Yes . Tip! To view a list of sent messages, press , and select Messa ging > Sent . Subevents, such as a text message sent in more than one part and packet data connec tions, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging cent er, or Web pages are shown as packet data connectio ns. To filter the log, select Options > Fi lter and a filter.
Make calls 16 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To erase the contents of the l og, recent calls register, and messaging delivery repo rt s permanently, select Option s > Clear log . Selec t Yes to confirm. To set the Log durati on , select Options > Settings > Log duration . The log events r emain in the device memory for a set number of days after which they are automatically erased to free memory. I f you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls regist er, and messagi ng delivery reports are permanently deleted. To view the details of a commun ication event, in the general log view scroll to an event, and press the scroll key. Tip! In t he details view you can copy a phone number to the clipboard, and paste it to a text message, for e xample. Select Options > Copy Number . Packet data counter and connecti on timer : To view how much data, measured in kiloby tes, is trans ferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated b y Pack. , and select Options > View de tails .
Contacts (Phonebook) 17 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) Press , and select Contacts . In Contacts you can add a personal ringin g tone or a thumbnai l image to a cont act card. You can als o create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-ma il to many recipients at the same time. You can add r eceived contact information (business cards) to contacts. See â Data and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . Contact information can only be sent to or received from compatible devices. Tip! Regularly back up the information on the device to a compatible memory card. Y o u can restore the information, such as contacts, to the device later. See â Memory ca rd tool âÂÂ, p. 5 . You can also use Nokia PC Suite to back up your contacts to a compatible PC. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Save names and numbers 1 Select Options > New con tact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit conta ct cards in Contact s , scroll to the co ntact card you want to edit, a nd select Options > Edit . To delete a contact card in Contacts , select a card, and press . To delete se veral contact cards at the same time, press and to mark the contacts, and press to dele te. Tip! To add and edit conta ct cards, use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. To attach a small thumbnail imag e to a co ntact ca rd, open the cont act card , and se lect Opt ions > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. Tip! To send contact information, s elect the card you want to send. Select Option s > Send > Via text message , Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetoo th . See â Messaging âÂÂ, p. 40 and â Send data using Bluetooth connectivity âÂÂ, p. 75 . Default numbers and addresses You can assign default number s or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a messa ge to the contact to a certain number or a ddress. The default number is also used in voice dialling. 1 In contacts, select a cont act, and press .
Contacts (Phonebook) 18 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you wan t to add a number or an address and Assign . 4 Select a number or an addr ess you want to set as a default. Copy contacts If you have phone numbers st ored on the SIM card, copy them to Contacts . Entries that are saved only on the SIM card are not shown in the contacts d irectory, and for incoming calls and messages, the device cannot match the number to the name. When a new SIM card is inserted in the device and you open Contacts for the first time, you are asked if you want to copy the contact entries on the SIM card to the device memory. Select Yes to copy the entries to your contacts directory. To copy individual names and numbers from a SIM card to your device, press , and select Cont acts > Optio ns > SIM contacts > SIM directory . Select the names you want to copy and Options > Copy to Contacts . To copy contacts to your SIM card , press , and select Contacts . Select the names y ou want to copy and Options > Copy to SIM direct. , or Options > Copy > To SIM directory . Only the contact card fiel ds supported by your SIM card are copied. Tip! You can synch ronise your contacts to a compatible PC with Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied wi th your device. SIM directory and other SIM services For availability and information on using SIM c ard services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service provider, network operator, or other vendor. Press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory to see th e names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In the SIM directory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, and you can make calls. To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, select Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dialling contacts . This setting is only shown if supported by your SIM card. To rest rict ca lls fro m your de vice to select ed phon e numbers, select Op tions > Activ. fixed dialling . To add new numbers to the fixed dialling list, select Op tion s > New SIM contact . You need the PIN2 code for these functions. When you use Fixed dialling , packet data connections are not possible, except when sending text messages over a packet data connection. In th is case, the message centre number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialling list.
Contacts (Phonebook) 19 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. When fixed dialing is activated, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into y our device. Add ringing tones for contacts When a contact or group member calls you, the device plays the chosen ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and your device recognises it). 1 Press to open a contact card, or go to the groups list, and select a contact g roup. 2 Select Options > Ringin g tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you wish to use for the individual contact or the selected group. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Create contact groups 1 In Contacts , press to open the groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group , and select OK . 4 Open the group, and select Options > Add membe rs . 5 Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Sele ct OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a group, select Options > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1 In the groups list, open the group you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remove from grou p . 3 Sele ct Yes to remove the contact from the group. Tip! To check to which groups a contact belongs, scroll to the contact, and s elect Options > Belongs to groups .
Camera and Gallery 20 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery Camera Your Nokia N72 has a high resolution camera on the back of the device that can be us ed to take still images and videos. To activate the camera, open the camera lens cover on the back of the device. The Camera application starts wh en the camera is activated, and you can see the view to be captured. In Camera , you can take pictures and record videos. To move between still image and video capture, select Op tions > Image mode or Video mode . The images and video clips ar e automatic ally saved in the Gallery . The came ras produce .jpeg images, and v ideo clips are recorded in the 3GPP f ile format with the .3gp file extension ( Normal video quality modes) or in the .mp4 file format ( High v ideo quality mode). See â Video settings âÂÂ, p. 26 . You can also send ima ges or a video in a multimedia message as an e-mail attachme nt, or by using Bluetooth connecti vity. Tip! You can insert a n image into a contact card. See â Save names and numbers âÂÂ, p. 17 . Your Nokia N72 supports an im age capture resolution of up to 1600 x 1200 pixels using the camera. The ima ge resolution in these materi als may appear different. Take pictures To make lighting and color adjustments before taking a picture, s elect Options > Image setup > Shooting mode , Flash , White balance , or Colour tone . See â Adjust color and lighting âÂÂ, p. 23 and â Shooting mo des âÂÂ, p. 23 . Tip! You can press the key or use the camera capture key (located on th e right hand side of the device) for still image capture. Camera indicators show the following: ⢠The device memory ( ) and memor y card ( ) indicators (1) show where images are saved. ⢠The images indicator (2) estimates how many images, depending on the selected image quality, can fit in the remaining memory of your device or a compatible memory card.
Camera and Gallery 21 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠The mode indicator (3) shows the active mode. See â Shooting modes âÂÂ, p. 23. ⢠The flas h indicato r (4) shows if the flash is set to Automatic () , On/ forced () , o r Off () . ⢠The resolution indicator (5) shows the selected image quality. See â Adj ust still image camera settings âÂÂ, p. 22 . ⢠The sequence mode indicator (6) shows that the sequence mode is active. See â Take pictures in a sequence âÂÂ, p. 21 . ⢠The self-timer indica tor (7) shows that the self-timer is activated. See â You in the pictureâÂÂself- timer âÂÂ, p. 22 . Saving the captured image may take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or color settings. When taking a picture, note the followin g: ⢠It is recommended to use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠To take images or record video in different environments, use the correct mode for each environment. See â Sh ooting modes âÂÂ, p. 23 . ⢠The quality of a zoomed pict ure is lower than that of a non-zoomed picture. ⢠The camera goes into the ba ttery saving m ode if there are no key presses within a minute. To continue taking pictures, press . After the image is taken, note the following: ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, press . ⢠To send the image, press and select Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth . For more information, see â Messaging âÂÂ, p. 40 and â Bluetooth connecti vity âÂÂ, p. 74 . This option is not available during an active call. ⢠To send an image to the other party during an active call, select Options > Send to caller . ⢠To edit the picture, select Optio ns > Edit . See â Edit images âÂÂ, p. 24 . ⢠To print the picture, select Options > Print . See â Image print âÂÂ, p. 35 . Take pictures in a sequence To set the camera to take pictur es in a sequence with a single press of the key or the camera capture key, select Options > Sequence mode . If you press and hold the key or the camera capture key, image capture continues until you release the key. You can capture up to 100 images, depending on the available mem ory.
Camera and Gallery 22 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. You can also use the sequence mode with the Activate self tim er . See â You in the pictureâÂÂself-timerâÂÂ, p. 22 . If the self-timer is activated, a ma ximum of six pictures can be captured. The pictures are automatically saved in Ga llery . You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer Use the self-timer to delay the taking of a picture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, select Option s > Activate self timer > 10 seconds , 20 seconds , or 30 second s . To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The self -timer indicator ( ) blinks and the device beeps when the timer is running. The camera takes the picture af ter the selected delay has elapsed. You can also use the Activate self timer in the sequence mode. See â Take pictures in a sequence âÂÂ, p. 21 . The flash Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera has an LED flash for low light c onditions. The following flash modes are available: Autom atic () , On/ forced () , a n d Of f () . Select Options > Image setup > Flash > On /for ced to use the flash. If the flash is set to Off or Automatic during bright conditions, the flash still emits a low light when an image is captured. This allows the subject of the picture to see when the picture is taken. Ther e is no flash effect on the resultant picture . Adjust still image camera settings There are two kinds of settings for the still image camera: Image setup settings and main settings. To adjust Imag e setup settings, see â Adjust color and lighting âÂÂ, p. 23 . The setup setting s return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To change the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Image quality â High - Print , Med. - E-mail , or Low - Multimedia . The better the image quality, the mo re memory the image consumes. The quality of a zoomed picture is lower than that of a non-zoomed picture. If you want to print the image, select High - Print (resolution 1600x1200). If you wa nt to send it through e-mail, select Med. - E-mail (resolution 1024x768). To send the image through MMS, select Low - Mult imedia (resolution 640x480).
Camera and Gallery 23 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Glossary: Resolution is a measure of sharpness and clarity of an image. Resolu tion refers to the number of pixels in an image. The more pix els, the more detailed the picture is, and the more memory it consumes . Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to save the image to a certain album in the gallery. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. Extended zoom âÂÂSelect On if you want to achieve maximum zoom but are prepared to accept lower im age resolution. Show captured image âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to see the captured image after it is taken, or No if you wa nt to continue taking pictures immediately. Default image name âÂÂSet a default name for the images you are going to take. You can repla c e the date with your own text (for example, âÂÂHoliday_2006âÂÂ). Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your images. Adjust color and lighting To enable the camera to re produce colors and lighting more accurately, or to add effects to your pictures or videos, select Options > Image setu p or Vid eo setup , and select from the following options: Shooting mode âÂÂSelect a mode for the environment in which you are taking pictur es. See â Shooting modes âÂÂ, p. 23 . Every mode uses its own lighting settings that have been adjusted according to a certain kind of environment. Flash (i mages and camera only)âÂÂSet the flash to Automati c , On/forced , or Off . See â The fla sh âÂÂ, p. 22 . White balance âÂÂSelect the current ligh ting condition from the list. This allows the came ra to reproduce colors mo re accurately. Colour tone âÂÂSelect a color effect from the list. The display changes to match any settings made, showing you how the change affects the pictures or videos. The settings return to the default settings when you close the camera. If you select a new mode, the settings are replaced by the settings of the selected mode. See â Shooting modes âÂÂ, p. 23 . If y ou need to change the setup settings, you can change th em after selecting a mode. Shooting modes Shooting modes help you to find the right color and lighting settings for the current environment. Select a mode for taking pictures or recording video clips from a modes list. The settings of each mode have been set according to a certain style or environment in which the
Camera and Gallery 24 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. pictures are taken. Select Options > Image setup / Video setup > Shooting mode : Video mode s Normal ( ) (default)âÂÂUse this mode in all conditions. Night ( )âÂÂUse this mode in low light conditions. Image modes Automati c ( ) (default)âÂÂUse this mode in all conditions. User define d ( ) â U s e t h i s m o d e t o create a personalized scene with your own flash, wh ite balance, and color tone settings. Portrait ( )âÂÂUse this mode to take portrait pictures, such as head shots and sitting poses. Landscape ( ) â U s e t h i s m o d e w h e n y o u t a k e p i c t u r e s o f objects that are further away. Night ( )âÂÂUse this mode in low light conditions. Sport ( )âÂÂUse this mode to take pict ures of fast moving objects. When you use this mode, the resolution of the images is reduced from 1600x1200 to 800x600. See Image quality , p. 22 . When taking pictures, the default mode is Automatic . If you selec t the User def ined m o d e , h o w e v e r , i t i s s e t a s t h e default mode. To make your own mode suita ble for a cert ain environment, select Us er define d mode. In the user mode you can adjust Based on mode , Flash , White balance, Colour tone , and Reset user mode options. To copy the settings of another mode, select Based on mode and the desired mode. Edit images To edit the pictures after taking them, or the ones already saved in Gallery , select Options > Edit . Select Apply effect to crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, color, contrast, compressi on, and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the picture. To crop a n image , select Options > Apply effect > Crop . Select Manual to crop the image size manually, or select a predefined aspect ratio from the list. If you select Manual , a cross appears on the upper le ft corner of the image. To move the cross, and select the area to be cropped, move the scroll key. Select Set . Another c ross appears on the lower right corner. Select again the area to be cropped, and select Crop . To add clip art to an image, select Options > Apply effect > Clip-art . Select the item y ou want to add from the list, and press . To move, rotate, a nd change the size of the item, select Options > Move , Resi ze , or Rotate .
Camera and Gallery 25 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To add text to an image, select Options > Apply effect > Text . Enter the text , and select OK . To edit the text, select Option s > Move , Resize , Rota te , or Select colour . Shortcuts in the image editor: ⢠To view an im age in the full screen mode, press . To return to the normal v iew, press again. ⢠To zoom in or out, press and . Record videos To move between still image and video capture, select Option s > Image mode or Video mode . Open the Video mode . To make lighting and color adjustments before recording a video, select Option s > Video setup > Shooting mode , White balance , or Colour tone . See â Adjust color and lighting âÂÂ, p. 23 . To select a mode, select Options > Video setup > Shooting mode . See â Shooting modes âÂÂ, p. 23 . 1 Press to start reco rding. The record icon is shown. The LED flash is lit, and a tone sounds, indicating to the subject that video is being recorded. There is no flash effect on the resultant video. 2 To pause recording at any time, select Pause . The pause icon ( ) blinks on the display. Video recording automatically stops if reco rding is set to pause and there are no key pr esses within a minute. 3 Sele ct Cont inue to resume recording. 4 Sele ct Stop to stop recording. The vi deo clip is automatically saved to the Images & video folder of Gallery . See â Gallery âÂÂ, p. 29 . Video recorder indicators show the following: ⢠The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators (1) show where the v ideo is sav ed. ⢠The current video length indicator (2 ) shows elapsed time and time remainin g. ⢠The mode indicat or (3) shows the active mode. See â Shooting modes âÂÂ, p. 23 . ⢠The microphone indicator (4) shows that the microphone is muted. ⢠The video quality indicator (5) shows the selected video quality. After a video clip is recorded: ⢠To immediately play the video clip you just recorded, select Option s > Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, press . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to record a new video, pres s .
Camera and Gallery 26 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠To send the video, press and select Via multimedia , Via e-m ail , or Via Bluetooth . For more information, see â Messaging âÂÂ, p. 40 and â Bluetooth connect ivity âÂÂ, p. 74 . This option is not avai lable during an active call. ⢠To send a video cli p to the other party during an active call, select Option s > Send to caller . ⢠To edit the video, select Options > Edit . See â Edit video clips âÂÂ, p. 27 . Video settings There are two kinds of settings for the video recorder: Video se tup setting s and main settings. To adjust Video setup settings, see â Adjust color and lighting âÂÂ, p. 23 . The setup settings return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To change the main settings, select Op tions > Settings and from th e following: Audio recording âÂÂSelect On if you want to record both image and sound. Video quali ty âÂÂSet the quality of the video clip to High , Normal , or Sharing . If you select High or Normal , the length of the video recording is restricted by the available space on your memory card, and up to 1 hour per clip. If you want to view the vid eo on a co mpatible TV or PC, select High video quality, which ha s CIF resolution (352x288) and file format .mp4. You cannot send video clips saved in the .mp4 f ormat in a multimedia message. If you want to view the clip in mobile phones, select Normal , which has QCIF resolution (176x144) and .3gpp file form at. To send the video clip throug h MMS, sele ct Sharing (QCIF resolution, .3gpp file format). The Normal video clip is limited to 300 KB (approximately 20 seconds in du ration) so that it can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Some networks, however, may only support sending of multimedia messages with a maximum size of 100 KB. Contact your service provider or network o perator for more informa tion. Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to save the recorded video clip to a certain a lbum in Gallery . Select Yes to open a list of available albums. Show captured video âÂÂSelect whether you want the recorded video clip to play automatically after the recording stops. Default v ideo name âÂÂDefine a name or select the date. Memory i n use âÂÂDefine the defau lt memory store: device memory or memory card.
Camera and Gallery 27 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Edit video clips You can edit video clips in Gallery . To edit video clips and create custom video clips, sc roll to a video clip, and select Options > Edit . To cr eate custom video clips, combine and trim video clips, and add images, sound cli ps, transi tions, and e ffects. Transiti ons are vis ual effects that you can add in the beginning and end of the video or between the video clips. In the video editor you can see two timelines: video clip timeline and sound clip timeline. If you add images , text, or transitions to a video clip , they are shown on the video clip timeline. To move on the ti meline s, scroll left or ri ght. To switch between the timelines, scroll up or down. Edit video, sound, i mage, text, and tra nsitions To create custom video clips, mark and select one or more video clips, and select Option s > Edit . Press and to move between the video clip and t he sound clip. To modify the video, select from the following options: Edit video clip : Cut âÂÂTrims the video clip in the cut video clip view. Add colour effect âÂÂInserts a color effect on the video clip. Use slow motion âÂÂSlows the speed of th e vid eo clip. Mute / Unmute âÂÂMutes or unmutes the original video clip sound. Move âÂÂMoves the video clip to the selected location. Remove âÂÂRemoves the video clip from the video. Duplicate âÂÂMakes a copy of the selected video clip. Edit text (shown only if you added text)âÂÂTo move, remove or duplicate text; change the color and style of the text; define how long it sta ys on the screen; and add ef fects to the text. Edit im age (shown only if you have added an image)âÂÂTo move, remove or duplicate an image; define how long it stays on the screen; and set a background or a color effect to the image. Edit sound cl ip : Cut âÂÂTrims the sound clip in the cut sound clip view. Move âÂÂMoves the sound clip to the selected location. Remove âÂÂRemoves the sound clip from the video. Duplicate âÂÂMakes a copy of the selected sound clip. Set duration âÂÂChanges the length of the sound clip.
Camera and Gallery 28 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Edit transition âÂÂThere are three types of transitions: at the start of a video, at the end of a vi deo, and trans itions between video clips. A start transition can be selected when the first transition of the video is active. Insert : Video cl ip âÂÂInserts the selected video clip. A thumbnail of the video clip is shown in the main view. A thumbnail consists of the first non-bla ck view of the video clip. The name and length of the se l ected video clip is also shown. Image âÂÂInserts the selected image. A thumbnail of th e image is shown in the main view. Text âÂÂInserts text to the video clip. You can insert a title, subtitle, or credits. Sound clip âÂÂInser ts the selected sound clip. The name and length of the selected sound clip is shown in the main view. New sound clip âÂÂRecords a ne w sound c lip to the sele cted location. Movie âÂÂPr eview the movie in the fu ll screen mode or as a thumbnail, sa ve or send the movie, or cut the movie to a proper size for sending it in a multimedia message. Tip! To take a snapshot of a video clip, select Options > Take snapshot in the thumbnail preview view or in the cut video view. To save your video, select Opti ons > Movie > Save . To define the Memory in use , select Options > Setti ngs . The default is the device memory. Tip! In the Settings view, you can define Default video name , Default image name , Resolution , and Memory in u se . Select Send > Via multi media , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth if you wa nt to send the video. Contact your service provider or netwo rk operator for details of the maximum multimedia message size th at you can send. If your video is too large to be sent in a multimedia message, appears. Tip! If you want to send a video clip that is over the maximum multimedia message size allowed by your service provider, you can send the clip using Bluetooth connectivity. See â Send data using Bluetooth connectivity âÂÂ, p. 75 . You can also tra nsfer your videos to your PC using Bluetooth wireless technology or by using a memory card reader (enhancement).
Camera and Gallery 29 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Gallery To store and organize your images, video clips, sound clips, playlists, and streaming links, press , and select Gallery . To open the gallery from the Camera application, se lect Option s > Go to Gallery . In Cam era , o nly the Images & video folder is available. Tip! To switch fr om Gallery to the camera, select Options > Go to Camera from the Images & video folder. Select Images & video , Tracks , Sound cli ps , Links , or All files , and press to open it. You can browse and open folders; and mark, c opy, and move items to folders. V ideo clips, .ram files, and stream ing links are opened and played in the RealPlayer application. See â RealPlayer âÂÂ, p. 36 . Music tracks are played and managed in the music player application. See â Music player âÂÂ, p. 68 . Tip! You can transfer images from your device to a compatible PC with Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite. See the C D-ROM supplied with your device. To copy or move files to a compatible memor y card or to device memory, select a file and Options > Organ ise > Copy to memory card / Move to memory card or Copy to phone mem. / Move to phone mem. . Files stored on the memory card are indicated with . To download files into Gallery in one of the main folders using the browser, select Graphic downls. , or Video downlds. , Track downlds. , or Sound downl ds. . T he browser opens, and you can se lec t a bookmark from which the site can download. View images and video clips Pictures taken and video clip s recorded with the camera are stored in the Images & vide o folder in Gallery . The quality of a video clip is indicated with one of the following icons: (High), (Normal), and (Sharing). Images and video c lips can also be sent to y ou in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through Bluetooth connectiv ity. To be able t o view a received image or video clip in the ga llery or in the media player, you must save it in the device memory or on a compatible memory card.
Camera and Gallery 30 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Open the Images & video folder in Gallery . The images and video clip files are in a loop, and ordered by date. The number of files can be seen on the display. To browse the files, scroll left or right. Pr ess and hold or to brow se the files in a continuous loop. To edit an image or a video clip, select Options > Edit . An image editor or a video editor opens. To save memory space after you print or upload your images, and still keep a small version of the image on your device, select Options > Shrink . To add an image or a video cl ip to an album in the gallery, select Op tions > Add to album . See â Albums âÂÂ, p. 30 . To create custom video clips, select a video clip, o r several clips in the gallery, and select Options > Edit . See â Edit video clips âÂÂ, p. 27 . To print your images on a printer connected to your device, or to store them on a compatible memory card for printing, select Op tions > Print . See â Image print âÂÂ, p. 35 . To zoom an image, select Options > Zoom in . The zooming ratio is at the top of the display. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To delete an image or video clip, press . Slide show Use Slide show to view images and video clips in the full screen mode. Select from the following: ⢠Start âÂÂto start the slide show. ⢠Play âÂÂto open the RealPlayer application. ⢠Pause âÂÂto pause the slide show. ⢠Continue âÂÂto r esume the slide show. ⢠End âÂÂto close the slide show. Press (faster) or (slower) to adjust the Tempo . Press (previous) or (next) to browse the thumbnails. To add sound to the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Music settin gs and from the following: ⢠Music âÂÂSelect On , or Off . ⢠Track âÂÂSelect a music file from the list. ⢠Volume âÂÂPress to decrease the volume, or to incr ease the volume. Albums With albums you ca n convenie ntly manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list, in the Images & video folder, select Options > Albums . The albums are ordered alphabetica lly. To view the content of an album, press .
Camera and Gallery 31 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To create a new al bum, select Options > New album . Enter a name for the albu m, and select OK . To add a picture or a video clip to an album in the gallery, scroll to a picture or video clip, and selec t Options > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or video clip, and press . To remove a file fr om an al bum, press . The fi le is not deleted from the Images & video folder in Galle ry . PrintOnline Note: The avail ability of this service may vary according to your countr y or sales ar ea, and the service may only be available in a limited number of languages. With the PrintOnline application you can print images online, and order different products with the selected image, such as mugs or mous e pads. The available products depend on the service provider. In order to use PrintOnline , you must subscribe to the service with an online printing service p rovider and have at least one printing service conf iguration file installed. The files can be obtained from prin ting service providers that support PrintOnline . You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. 1 Press , and select Gallery > Images & video . Select an imag e or images, and Option s > Print > Order prints . 2 Select a service provider from the list. 3 Sele ct Options and from the fol lowing: Open âÂÂto start the connection to the service provider. Remove âÂÂto remove the service provider from the list. If you remove the last servic e prov ider from the list, the Order prints option is not available until you have at least one configuration file installed. Log âÂÂto view the details of the previous orders: the name of the service provider, total sum, and status of the order. When you are connected to the service provider server, the images preview view opens, and displays the images you selected in Gallery . 4 Sele ct Options and from the fol lowing: Preview âÂÂto view the image before ordering a print. Scroll up or down to view the images. Order now âÂÂto submit your order. Change product order âÂÂto adjust the product details and number of copies for the selected image. In the product order view, you can select which product and of what type you want to order. The available opti ons and products vary depending on the service provider.
Camera and Gallery 32 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Scroll left or right to view and change the image details of the other images in the order. Change customer info âÂÂto change the customer and order information. You ca n copy the customer information from con t acts. Add image âÂÂto add more images to the order. Remove image âÂÂto remove images from the order. Log âÂÂto view the details of the previous orders. When the order is sent, Order sent succe ssfully is displayed. Online sharing Note: The availability of this service may vary according to your country or sales area, and the service may only be available in a limited number of languages. With the Onli ne sharing application, you can share your images and videos in online al bums, weblogs, or in other online sharing services on the Web. You can upload content, save unfini shed posts a s drafts and co ntinue later, and view the content of the albums. The supported content types may vary depending on the service provider. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Get starte d To use Online sharing , you must subscribe to the service with an online image sharing service pr ovider. You can usually subscribe to the service on the Web page of the service provider. Contact your service provider for details on subscribing to t he service. For more informati on on compatible service providers, see www.nokia-asia.com/ When you open the service for the firs t time in the Online sharing application, you are prompted to provide the user name and password. You can access the settings later throug h Options > Settings in the Online sharing application. See â Online sharing settings âÂÂ, p. 33 . Upload files Press , and select Gallery > Images & vide o , the files you want to upload, and Options > Send > Web upload . You can access the Online sharing application also from the main camera. The Select service view opens. To cr eate a new account to a service, select Options > Add new account or the service icon with the text Create new in the services list. If you have created a new acc ount offline, or modified an account or service settings through a Web browser on a compatible PC, to update the services list in your device, select Options > Retrieve services . To select a service, press the scroll key. N72/support.
Camera and Gallery 33 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. When you select the service, the selected images and videos are shown in the edit state. You can open and view the files, reorganize them, add text to them, or add new files. To cancel the Web upload process, and save the created post as a draft, select Back > Save as draft . If the uploading has already started, selec t Cancel > Save as draft . To connect to the service and upload the files to the Web, select Options > Upload , or press . Open online se rvice To view uploaded images and videos in the online service, and draft and sent en tries in your device, in the Images & video folder, select Options > Online Se rvices . If you have created a new account offline, or modified an account or service settings through a Web browser on a compatible PC, to update the services list in your device, select Option s > Retrieve services . Select a serv ice from t he list. After you open a s ervice, select fro m the following: ⢠Open in Web browser âÂÂto connect to the selected service and view the upload ed and draft albums in the Web browser. The view may vary depending on the service provider. ⢠Drafts âÂÂto view and edit th e draft entries, and u pload them to the Web. ⢠Sent âÂÂto view the 20 latest entries created through your device. ⢠New post âÂÂto create a new entry. The available options may vary depend ing on the service provi der. Online sharing settings To edit the Online sharing settings, in the Online sharing application, select Options > Settin gs . My accounts In My accounts , you can create new accounts or edit existing accounts. To crea te a new account, select Opti ons > Add new account . To edit an existin g account, select an account and Options > Edit . Select from the following: Account name âÂÂto enter a name for the account. Service prov ider âÂÂto select the service provider you want to use. You cannot change the service provider for an existing account, you must create a new account for the new service provider. If you delete an a ccount in My accoun ts , the services related to the account are also deleted from you device, including the sent items for the service. User name and Password âÂÂto enter the user name and password you created for your account when you registered to the online service.
Camera and Gallery 34 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Upload image size âÂÂto sele ct the size in which the im ages are uploaded to the service. Application settings Display image size âÂÂto select the size in which the image is shown on the display of yo ur device. This setting does not affect the upload image size. Display text size âÂÂto select the font size used to display text in draft and sent entries, or when you add or edit text to a new entry. Advanced Service providers âÂÂto view or edit service provider settings, add a new service provider, or view details of a service provider. If you change the service provider, all the My accounts information for the previous service provider is lost. You cannot change the settin g s of predefined service providers. Default access point âÂÂto change the access point used to connect to the online service, select the access point you want.
Imaging 35 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging Image print To print images with Image print , select the print option in the gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image pr int to p rint your images using a compatible USB data cable, Bluetooth connectivity, or a compatible memory card. You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. The pictures taken with the camera are automatically saved in .jpg format. To print to a PictBridge-compli a nt printer, select the print option before you connect the USB cable. Select the image you want to print and Options > Print . Printer selection When you use Image pri nt for the first time, a list of available printers is displaye d after you select the image. Select a printer you want to use. The printer is set as the default printer. If you have connected a p rinter compatible with P ictBridge using a co mpatib le data cab le, for ins tance the Nokia Connectivity cab le CA-53, th e printer is automatically disp laye d. If the default printer is not available, a list of av ailable printing devices is displayed. Print preview The print preview view opens only when you start printing an image in the gallery or the active standby mode. The images that you selected are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scr oll left and right through the available layouts for the selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, scroll up or down to display the additional pages. Print settings The available options vary, depe nding on the capab ilities of the printing device you selected. To select the paper size, select Pape r size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cance l to return to the previous view.
Imaging 36 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. RealPlayer Press , and select Imaging > RealPlaye r . With RealPlayer , you can play video clips, sound clips, and playlists, or stream media files over the air. You can activate a streaming link when y ou browse Web pages, or store it in the device memory or a compatible memory card. RealPlayer supports files with extensions such as .aac, .awb, .m4a, .mid, .mp3, and .wav. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support al l file formats or all the variations of file formats. For example, RealPlayer attempts to open all .mp4 f iles, but some .mp4 files may include content that is not compliant with 3GPP standards and, therefore, is not supported by this device. Tip! You can transfer music file s from your device to a compatible memory ca rd with Nokia Audio Manager available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Play video or sound clips 1 To play a media file stored in device memory, or on a compatible memory card, select Options > Open and from the fo llowing: Most recent clips âÂÂto play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer . Saved clip âÂÂto play a file saved in Gallery . See â Gallery âÂÂ, p. 29 . 2 Scroll to a file, and press to play the file. Tip! To view a video clip in full screen mode, press . Press again to change back to normal screen mode. Icons in RealPlayer : âÂÂRepeat; âÂÂRandom; â Repeat and random; and âÂÂLoudspeaker muted. Create a track list To create a track list of the music tracks on your device memory or a compatible me mory card: 1 Select Options > New track list . 2 Select the memory from which you want to select the music tracks. 3 Enter a name for the track list. 4 Select the music tracks you want to include in the track list. 5 Select Back . The track list automatically st arts to play. Tip! To leave the application open and play music in the background, press twice to return to the standby mode. To return to the application, press , and select RealPlayer .
Imaging 37 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Shortcuts during play: ⢠To fast forward, press and hold . ⢠To rewind through the media file, press and hold . ⢠To mute the sound, press and hold until is displayed. To turn on the so und, press and hold until you see . Stream content over the air Many service providers require you to use an Internet access point (IAP) for your default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. The access points may be conf ig ured when you first start your device. Contact you r serv ice provide r for mo re info rmation. Note: In RealPlayer , you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer will rec ognise an http link to a .ram file. To stream content over the air, select a streaming link saved in Gallery , on a Web page, o r received in a text message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loa ding the co ntent. Th e conten t is not sav ed in the device. Receive RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a special text message from the network operator or service provider. See â Data and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . For more information , contact your network opera tor or service provider. Change the RealPlayer settings Sele ct Options > Se ttings and from the following: Video âÂÂto have Real Player automatical ly repeat video clips after they fi nish playing. Audio settings âÂÂto select if you want to repeat playing of track lists and play sound clip s on a track list in random order. Connec tion settin gs âÂÂto select whether to use a proxy server, change the default access point, and set the time-outs and port range used when connecting. Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Proxy settings : Use proxy âÂÂTo use a proxy server, select Yes . Proxy serv. address âÂÂEnter the IP address of the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the port number of the proxy server.
Imaging 38 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Glossary : Proxy servers are intermediate servers between media servers and their users. Some service providers use them to provide additio nal security or speed up access to browser pa ges that contain sound or video clips. Network se ttings : Default access poin t âÂÂScrol l to the acce ss poin t you wa nt to use to connect to the Internet, and press . Online t ime âÂÂSet the time for RealPlayer to discon nect from the network when you pause a media clip playing through a network link, select Us er defined , and press . Enter the time, and select OK . Lowest UDP port âÂÂEnter the lowest port number of the servers port range. The minimum value is 697 0. Highest UDP port âÂÂEnter the highest port number of the servers port range. The maximum value is 32000. Select Options > Advance d settings to edit the bandwidth values for different networ ks. Movie director To create muvees, press , and select Imaging > Movie . Muvees are short, edited video clips that can contain video, images, music, and text. Quick muvee is created automatically by Movie director after you select the style for the muvee. Movie dir ecto r uses the default music and text associated with the chos en style. Every style has its own font style, color, music, and pace. In a Custom muvee you can select your own video and music clips, images and style, and add an op ening and closing message. You can send muvees in a multimedia message. Open Movie , and press or to move between the and views. You can also return to the main view from the view by selecting Done . The view contains a list of video clips that you can Play , Se nd , Rename , and Delete . Create a quick muvee 1 In the Movie main view, select Quick muvee . 2 Select a style for the muvee from the style list. The created muvee is saved in the Movie dir e ctor muvee list. The muvee is played automatically after saving. Tip! To download new styles to your device, select Style downlds. (network service) fr om the Movie director main vie w. Create a custom muvee 1 In the Movie main view, select Custom muvee . 2 Select the clips you want to include in your muvee in Video , Image , Style , or Music .
Imaging 39 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. After you select video c lips and images, to define the order in which the files are pl ayed in the muvee, select Option s > Advanced options . To select the file you want to move, press the scroll key. Then scroll to the file below which you want to pl ace the marked file, an d press the scroll key. To cut the video clips, select Options > Select contents . See â Select content âÂÂ, p. 39 . In Message you can add an opening and closing text to a muvee. 3 Select Create muvee and from the following: Multimedia message âÂÂto optimize the le ngth of the muvee for MMS sending. Auto-sel ect âÂÂto include all the selected pictures and video clips in the muvee. Same as music âÂÂto set the muvee duration to be the same as the chosen music clip. User defined â to define the length of the muvee. 4 Select Options > Save . To preview the custom muvee before saving it, in the Preview muvee view, select Options > Play . To create a ne w custom muvee by using the same style settings, selec t Options > Recreate . Select content After you select images and video clips for your muvee, you can edit the selected video clips. Select Options > Advanced options > Op tions > Select contents . You can select which parts of the video clip you want to include or exclude in the muvee. A slider below the video screen indicates the included, exclu ded, and neutralized parts with colors: green is for included, red is for excluded, and grey is for neutral parts. To include a part of the video clip in the muvee, scroll to the part, and select Options > Include . To exclude a part from the video clip, scroll to the part, and select Option s > Exclude . To let Movie director randomly include or exclude a part of the video clip, scroll to the part, and select Option s > Mark as neutral . To exclude a shot from the video clip, select Options > Exclude shot . To let Movie director randomly include or exclude parts of the video clip, select Options > Mark all as neutral . Settings Sele ct Settings to edit the following options: Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your muvees. Resolution âÂÂSelect the r esolution of your muvees. Default muvee name âÂÂSet a default name for the muvees.
Messaging 40 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging Press , and select Messaging . In Messagin g , you can create, send, receive, view, edit, and organ ise text messages, multimedia mess ages, e-mail messages, and special text messages cont aining data. You can also receive messages and da ta through B luetooth connectiv ity, receiv e Web serv ice messages, cell broadcast messages, and send service comma nds. Note: Only devices that have compatible features can rece ive and dis p lay mult imedia messa ges. The appearance of a message may vary de pending on the receiving device. When you open Messagin g , you can see the New message function and a list of folders: Inbox âÂÂContain s received messa ges except e-mail and cell broadc ast messag es. E-ma il messag es are stored in the Mailbox . My folders âÂÂFor organising your messages into folders. Mailbox âÂÂIn Mailbox you can connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messa ges or view your p reviously retrie ved e-mail messages offline. See â E-mai l âÂÂ, p. 53 . Drafts âÂÂStores draft messages that have not been sent. Sent âÂÂStores the last 20 messages that ha ve been sent excluding messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity. To change the number of messages to be saved, see â Other settings âÂÂ, p. 55 . Outbox âÂÂA temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Reports âÂÂYou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service ). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message tha t has been sent to an e-mail address mi ght not be possible. Tip! When you have opened any of the default folders, you can switch between the folders by pressing or . To enter and send service requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network services, to your service provid er, select Options > Service command in the main view of Messaging .
Messaging 41 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receiv e messages on various topics, su ch as weather or traf fic conditions from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, co ntact your service provider. In the main view of Messaging , select Option s > Cell broadcast . In the main view you can see the status of a topic, a topic number, name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-u p. Write text Traditional text input , , and indicate the selected charac ter mode. indicates number mode. is displa yed when you are writing text using traditional text input. ⢠Press a number key ( â ) repeatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key than are printed on the key. ⢠To insert a number, press and hold the number key. ⢠To switch between letter an d number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait un til the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period), and enter the letter. ⢠To erase a character, press . Press and hold to clear more than one character. ⢠T he most common punctuat ion mark s are available under . Press repeatedly to reach the desired punctua tion mar k. Press to open a list of special characters . Use to move th rough the list, an d select a character. ⢠To insert a space, press . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠T o switch between the different character modes, pres s . Predictive text inputâÂÂdictionary You can enter any letter with a si ngle keypress. Predictive text input is based on a built -in dictionary to which you can also add new words. When the dictionary becomes full, the latest added word replaces the oldest. 1 To activate predictive text input, press , and select Dictionary on . This activates predictive text input for all editors in the device. is displayed when you write text using predictive text input.
Messaging 42 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. 2 To write the desired word, press the keys ( â ). Press each key only once for one letter. For example, to write "Nokia" when the English dictionary is selected, press for N, for o, for k, for i, and for a. The word suggestion changes after each keypress. 3 When you finish writing the wo rd and it is correct, to confirm it, press , or press to add a space. If the word is not correct, press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionar y has found one by one, or press , and select Dictionary > Matches . If the ? character is shown after the word, t he word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, select Spell , enter the word using traditional text input, and select OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 4 Start writing the next word. Tip! To set predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly. Tips on predictive text input To erase a c haracter, press . Press an d hold to c lear more th an one char acter. To change between the different character modes, press . If you press quickly twice, predic tive text input is turned off. Tip! Predictive text input tries to guess which commonly used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is needed. The order and availability of the punctuation marks depend on the language of the dictionary. To insert a number in letter mode, press and hold the desired number key. To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . The most common punctuation marks are available under . Press and then repeatedly to search for the desired punctuation mark. Press and hold to open a list of special c haracters. Press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one. Press , select Dictionary , and press to select one of the following options: Matches âÂÂView a list of words that correspond to your key presses. Insert word âÂÂAdd a word to the dictionary by using traditional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. Edit word âÂÂEdit the word using traditional text input. This is availabl e if the word is active (underlined).
Messaging 43 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tip! When you press , the following options appear (depending on the editing mode): Dictionary (predictive text input), Alpha mode (traditional text input), Number mode , Cut (if text has been selected), Copy (if text has been selected), Paste (when text has been cut or copied first), Inser t number , Insert symbol , and Writing language: (changes the input language for all editors in the device). Write compound word s Write the first half of a co mpound word; to confirm it, press . Wri te the last part of the compound word. To complete the compound word, press to add a space. Turn predictive text input off Press , and select Dictionary > Off to turn predictive text input off for all edito rs in the device. Copy text to clipboard 1 To select letters and words, press and hold . At the same time, press or . As the selection moves, text is highlighted. 2 To copy the text to the clipboard, while still holding , select Copy . 3 To insert the text into a document, press and hold , and select Paste ; or press once, and select Paste . To select lines of text, press and hold . At the same time, press or . To remove the selected text from the document, pres s . Write and send messages The appearance of a multimedia message may vary, depend ing on the receivi ng device. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Tip! You can start to create a message from a ny application that has the option Send . Select a file (image or text) to be added to the message, and select Options > Send . Before you can create a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the co rrect connection settings in place. See â Receive MMS and e-mail settings âÂÂ, p. 45 and â E-mail âÂÂ, p. 53. The wireless network may li mit the siz e of MMS messages. If the inserted picture ex ceed s this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS.
Messaging 44 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1 Select New message . A list of message options opens. Text message âÂÂto send a text message. Multimedia message âÂÂto send a multimedia message (MMS). E-mail âÂÂto send an e- mail. If you have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. 2 Press to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. Press to add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients. You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. Tip! Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. You can mark several recipients at a time. 3 Press to move to the message field. 4 Write the message. 5 To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert object > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . When sound is added, is shown. You cannot send video clips that are save d in the .mp4 format in a multimedia m essage. To ch ange the form at in which recorded videos are saved, see â Video settings âÂÂ, p. 26 . 6 To take a new picture or record sound or video for a multimedia message, select Options > In sert new > Image , Sound clip , or Video c lip . To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide . Select Options > Preview to see what the multimedia message look s like. 7 To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , or Not e . E-mail attachments are indicated b y in the navigation bar. Tip! To send files other than sounds and notes as attachments, open the appropriate application, and select Options > Send > Via e-mail , if available. 8 To send the message, select Options > Send , or press .
Messaging 45 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your device supports the sendin g of text messages beyond the character limit for a single message. Lon g er messages are sent as a series of two or more messages. Your serv ice provider may cha rge accordingl y. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options like Chinese, take up more space limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. In the navigation ba r, you can see the message length indicator counting backwards. For example, 10 (2) means that you can still add 10 characters for the text to be sent as two messages. Note: E-m a il messages are automatically placed in Outbox before sending. If sending does not succeed, the e-mail is left in the Outbox with the Failed status. Tip! In Messaging you can also create presentations and send them in a multimedia message. In the multimedia message editor view, select Options > Create p resen tation (shown only if MMS creati on mode is set to Guided or Free ). See â Multimedi a messages âÂÂ, p. 52 . Tip! When you send a multimedia messag e to an e-mail address or a devi ce that supports the receiving of large images, use the larger image size. If you are not sure of the receiving device, or the network does not support sending large files, it is recommended that you use a smaller image size or a sound clip that is no longer than 15 seconds. To change the setting, select Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Image si ze in the Messaging main view. Receive MMS and e-mail settings You may receive the settings in a text message from your network operator or service provider. See â Data and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . For availability of and subscr iption to data services, contact your network opera tor or service provider. Follow the instructions given by your s ervice provider. Enter the M MS settings manu ally: 1 Sele ct Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Access points , and define the settings for a multimedia mess aging access point. See â Connection settings âÂÂ, p. 87 . 2 Sele ct Messa ging > Options > Settings > Multimedia messag e > Access point in use and the ac cess point you created to be used as the preferred connection. See al so â Multimedia messages âÂÂ, p. 52 .
Messaging 46 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Before you can send, r eceive, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, you must do the following: ⢠Configure an Internet access point (IAP) correctly. See â Connection settings âÂÂ, p. 87 . ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly. See â E-mail âÂÂ, p. 53 . You need to have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions g iven by yo ur remote mailbox and Internet service prov ider (ISP). InboxâÂÂreceive messages Inbox icons: âÂÂunread messages in Inb ox ; â unread text message; âÂÂunread mu ltimedia message; âÂÂdata received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new message are shown in the standby mode. Select Show to open the message. To open a message in Inbox , sc roll to it , and press . Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may contain malicious software or otherwise be har mful to your devic e or PC. You may receive a notification that you have received a multimedia message that is saved in the multimedia message centre. To start a pa cket data connection to retrieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a mess age, and simultan eously listen to a sound through the loudspeake r ( is shown if sound is included). Click the arrow in the icon to listen to the sound. To see what kind s of media obj ects have been included in the multimedia message, open the message, and select Options > Obj ects . You can choose to save a multimedia object file in your device or send it, for example, through Bluetooth connectivity t o another co mpatible device. To view received multimed ia presentations, select Options > Play presentation . Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Data and settings Your device can receive many kinds of text messages that contain data ( ), also called ove r-the-air (OTA) messages:
Messaging 47 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Configur ation message âÂÂYou may receive a text message service number, voice mailbox number , Internet access point settings, access point l ogin script settings, or e-mail settings from your network ope rator, service provider, or company information management departmen t in a configuration message. To save the settings, select Option s > Save all . Busines s card âÂÂTo save the information to Contacts , select Option s > Save bus iness card . Certificates or sound files attached to the business card are not saved. Ringin g to ne âÂÂTo save the ri nging tone, selec t Opt ions > Save . Operator logo âÂÂFor the logo to be shown in the standby mode instead of the network operatorâÂÂs own identification, select Options > Save . Calendar entry âÂÂTo save the invitation, select Options > Save to Calendar . Web message âÂÂTo save the bookmark to the bookmarks list in Web, select Options > Add to bo okm arks . If the message contains both access point settings and bookmarks, to save the data, select Options > Save al l . E-mail noti fication âÂÂTel ls you how many ne w e-mail s you have in your remote mailbox. An extended notification may list more detailed information. Tip! If you receive a vCa rd file that has a picture attached, the picture is saved to contacts. Web service messages Web service mess ages ( ) are notifications (for example, news headlines) and may contai n a text message or a link. For availability and subscription, contact your service provi der. My folders In My folders , you can organise your messages into folders, create new folders, and rename and delete folders. Tip! You can use texts in the templates folder to avoid rewriting messages that you send often. Mailbox If you select Mailbox and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. See â E-mail âÂÂ, p. 53 . When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes.
Messaging 48 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Open the mailbox When you open the mailbox, you can choose wheth er you want to view the previously retrieved e-mail messages and e-mail headings offline or co nnect to the e-mail server . When you scroll to y our mailbox, and press , the device asks you if you want to Conne ct to mailbox? . Select Yes to connect to your mailbox, and retr ieve new e-mail headings or messages . When you view mess ages online, you are continuously connected to a re mote mailbox using a packet data connection. See also â Connection settings âÂÂ, p. 87. Select No to view previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. When you view e -mail messages offline, your device is not connected to the remote mailbox. Retrieve e-mail messages If you are offline, select Option s > Con nect to st art a connection to a remote mailbox. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious softwar e or otherwise be harmful to you r device or PC. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail . New âÂÂto retrieve all new e-mail messages to your device. Selected âÂÂto retrieve only the e-mail messages that have been marked. All âÂÂto retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving mess ages, select Cancel . 2 After you retrieve the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online, or select Options > Disconnect to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline. E-mail status icons: New e-mail (offline or online mode): the content has not been retrieved to your device. New e-mail: the content has been retrieved to your device. The e-mail message has been read. The e-mail heading has been read and the message content has been deleted from the device. 3 To open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrieved (arr ow in the icon is pointing outwards) and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve t his message from the mailbox.
Messaging 49 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To view e-mail attachments, open a message that h as the attach ment indicator , and s elect Opti ons > Attachments . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the device; select Options > Retrie ve . In the Attachment s view, you can ret rieve, open, save, or remove attachments. You can also send attachments using Blu etooth connectivity. Tip! If your mailbox uses the IMAP4 protocol, you can define how many messages to retrieve, and whether to retrieve the attachments. See â E-mail âÂÂ, p. 53 . With the POP3 prot ocol, the options are Headers only , Partially (kB) , or Msgs. & attachs. . Retrieve e-mail messages auto matically To retrieve messages automatically, select Options > E-mail settings > Au tomatic retrieval > Header retrieval . Select Always on or Only in home net. , and define when, and how often, the messages are retr ieved. Retrieving e-mail messages automatically may incre a se your call costs due to the data traffic. Delete e-mail messages To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remo te mailbox, select Option s > Delete . In Delete msg. fr om: , select Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your de vice. If you want to remove the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, and then make a connection from your device to th e remote mailbox again to update the status. Tip! To copy an e-mail from the remote mailbox to a folder under My fol ders , select Options > Copy to folder , a folder from the list, and OK . To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Option s > Delete . In Delete msg. from: , select Phone and ser ver . If you are offline, the e-mail is deleted first from your device. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it is automatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only after you have closed the connection to the remote mailbox. To cancel deleting an e-mail from the device and serve r, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Options > Undelete .
Messaging 50 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, select Options > Disconnect to end the packet data connection to the remote mailbox . Tip! If you leave your mailbox connection open, the new e-mail ( Headers on ly as defau lt) is retrieved from the remote mailbox to your device automatically (only if th e IMAP IDLE function is supported by your server). To leave the messaging application open in the background, press twice. Leaving the connection open may increas e your call costs due to the data traffic. View e-mail messages when offli ne When you open Mailbox the next time and you want to view and read th e e-mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? qu ery. You can read the previously retrieved e-mail headings, the retrieved e-mail messages, or both. You can al so write new, reply to, or forward e-mail to be sent the next time you connect to the mailbox. OutboxâÂÂmessages waiting to be sent Outbox is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Status of the messages in Outbox : Sending âÂÂA connection is being made and the message is being sent. Waitin g / Queued â T h e m e s s a g e w i l l b e s e n t w h e n p r e v i o u s messages of a similar type have been sent. Resend at (time)âÂÂThe device will try to send the message again after a time -out period. Select Options > Send to restart the sending immediately. Deferred âÂÂYou can set documents to be on hold while they are in Outbox . Scroll to a message that is being sent, and select Options > Defer send ing . Failed âÂÂThe maximum number of sending attempts has been reached. Sending has f ailed. If you were trying to send a text message, open the message, and check that the sending options are correct. Example: Messages are plac ed in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. You can also sc hedule e-mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox.
Messaging 51 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. View messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, you need to copy them to a folder in your device. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mark/Unmar k > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A l ist of folders opens. 4 Select a folder and OK to st art copying. Open the folder to view the messages. Messaging settings Text messages Select Messaging > Op tions > Settings > Text message . Message centres âÂÂLists all the text message centres that have been defined. Msg. c entre in use âÂÂSelect which message centre is used for delivering text messages. Receive report âÂÂTo request the network to send delivery reports on your messa ges (network service). W hen set to No , only the Sent status is shown in the log. See â LogâÂÂ, p. 14 . Message val idity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed from the text message centre. The network must support this fe ature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. Message sent as âÂÂChange this option on ly if you are sure that your message ce ntre is ab le to convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your network operator. Preferred conne ction âÂÂYou can send text messages through the normal GSM n etwork or through packet data, if supported by the network. See â Connection settings âÂÂ, p. 87 . Reply via same ctr. âÂÂSelect Yes , if you want the reply message to be sent usin g the same text message centre number (net work s ervice) . Add a new text m essage centre 1 Sele ct Message cent res > Options > New msg. centre . 2 Press , write a name for the message centre, and select OK . 3 Press and , and write the number of the text message centre. You receive the n u mber from your service provider. 4 Sele ct OK . 5 To use the new settings, go back to the settings view. Scroll to Msg. centre in use , and select the new message centre.
Messaging 52 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Multimedia messages Select Messaging > Options > Set tings > Multimedia messag e . Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia messag e. The options ar e Original (shown only when the MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free ), Small , and Large . Select Original to increase the size of the multimedia message. MMS creation mode âÂÂIf you select Gu ided , the device informs you if you try to send a messag e that m ay not be supported by the recipient. Select Restricted ; the device prevents you from sending messages that may not be supported. Access point in use ( Must be defined )âÂÂSelect which access point is used as the preferred connection for the multimedia message centre. Multimedia retrieval âÂÂSelect how you want to re ceive multimedia messages. To receive multimedia messages automatically in your home network, select Aut. in home network . Outside your home networ k, you recei ve a notification that you have re ceived a multimedia message that is saved in the multim edia message centre. You can select if you want to retrieve the message t o your device. When you are outside your home network, sending and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. If you select Multime dia re trieva l > Always automatic , your device automatically mak es an active packet data connection to retrieve the message both in and outside your home network. Allow anon. messages âÂÂSelect No if you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender. Receive adverts âÂÂDefine whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements. Receive report âÂÂSelect Yes if you want the status of th e sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to a n e-mail a ddress might not be possible. Deny report sending âÂÂSelect Yes if you do not want your device to send delivery repor ts of receiv ed multimed ia messages. Message validit y âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity period, the mess age is removed from the multimedia messagin g cent re. The network must support this feature. Maximum t ime is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. Tip! You may also obtain the multimedia and e-mail settings from your service provider throug h a configuration message. Contact your service provider for more in formation. See â Data and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 .
Messaging 53 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. E-mail Select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail , or in the mailbox main view, select Options > E-mail settings and from the following: Mailbo x in us e âÂÂSelect which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail. Mailboxes âÂÂOpens a list of mailboxes that have been defined. If no mailboxes have been defined, you are prompted to do so. Select a mailbox to change the following settings: Mailbox settings , User settings , and Automatic retrieval . Mailbox settings : Mailbox name âÂÂEnter a descriptive name for the mailbox. Access point in use ( M ust be defined )â Choose an Internet access point (IAP) for t he mailbox. See â Connection settings âÂÂ, p. 87. My e-mail ad dress ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Replies to your messages are sent to this address. Outgoing mail server ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e-mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your network operator. Contact your service provider for more info rmation. Send message âÂÂDefine how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immed iately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select When conn. avail. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. User name âÂÂEnter your user name, given to you by your service provider. Password: âÂÂEnter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for th e password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Mailbox type: âÂÂDefines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings. If you use the POP3 protocol, e-mail messages are not upda ted automatically in online mode. To see the latest e-mail messages, you must disconnect and make a new connection to y our mailbox. Security (por ts) âÂÂUsed with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to the remote mailbox.
Messaging 54 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. APOP secure lo gin (no t shown if IMAP4 is selected for Mailbox type )âÂÂUsed with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to th e remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. User settin gs : E-mails to retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂDefine how many new e-mails are retrieved to the mailbox. Retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set t o IMAP4)âÂÂDefine which parts of the e-mails are retrieved: Headers only , Parti ally (kB) , or Msgs. & attachs. . Retrieve attachments (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂChoose whether you want to retrieve e-mail with or without attachments. Subscribed folders (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂYou can subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those folders. Send copy to se lf âÂÂSelect Yes t o s a v e a c o p y o f t h e e - m a i l to your remot e mailbox and to the address defined in My e-mail address . Include signature âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. My name âÂÂEnter your own name here. Your name replaces your e-mail address in th e recipientâÂÂs phone when the recipientâÂÂs phone supports this function. Automatic retrie val : Header retrieval âÂÂWhen this function is on, messages are retrieved automatically. You can define when, and how often, the messages are retrieved. Activating Header retrieval may increase your ca ll cost s due to the data tr affic. Web service messages Select Messaging > Opt ions > Sett ings > Service message . Choose whether you want to receive service messages. If you want to set the device to automatically activate the browser and st art a network connection to retrieve con t ent when you receive a service message, select Download messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast Check the available topics and related topic numbers wi th your service provider, and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > Cell broadcast to change the settings. Reception âÂÂChoose whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages.
Messaging 55 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Language â All allows you to receive cell broadc ast messages in all supported languages. Selected allows you to choose in which languages you wish to receive cell broadcast messages. If you cannot find the desired language, select Other . Topic detection âÂÂIf you set Topic detection > On , the device automatical ly searches for new topi c numbers, and saves the new numbers without a name to the topic list. Select Off if you do not want to save new topic numbers automatically. Other settings Select Messaging > Op tions > Settings > Other . Save sent messages âÂÂChoose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you send to the Sent folder. No. of saved msgs. âÂÂDefine how many sent messages are saved to the Sent folder at a time. The default limit is 20 messages. When the limit is re ached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use âÂÂChoose the memory where you want to save your messages: Phone memory or Memory card . New e-mail al erts âÂÂChoose whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications, a tone or a note, when new mail is received t o the mailbox.
Radio 56 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Radio Press , and select Radio . You can use the application as a traditional FM radio with automatic tuning and saved stations, or wi th parallel v isu al information related to the radio program on the display, if you tune to stations that offer Visual Radio service. Th e Visual Radio ser vice uses packet data (network service) . You can listen to the FM radio while usi ng other applications. To use the Visual Radio servic e, the following conditions are required: ⢠The device must be switched on. ⢠The device must have a valid SIM car d inserted. ⢠The station you listen to and the network operator you use must support this service. ⢠A n Internet access point must be defined to access the operatorâÂÂs Visu al Radio server. ⢠The station must have the correct Visual Radio service ID defined and Visual Radio service enabled. See â Saved stations âÂÂ, p. 57 . If you do not have access to the Visual Radio service, the operators and radio stations in your area may no t support Visual Radio. The Visual Radi o service may not be available in all areas and c ountries. You can normally make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is turned off when there is an active call. When the call is finished, you may need to turn th e radio back on manual ly. The radio selects the used frequency band based on the country info rmation rec eived from the network. If this information is not available, yo u may be asked to select the region yo u are locate d in, or you can select the re gion in the Visual Radio settings. Listen to the radio Note that the quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible headset or enhancement needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. Press , and select Radio . To start a st ation search, select or . Searching st ops when a station is found. To change the frequency manually, select Options > M anual tuning .
Radio 57 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. If you have previously saved radio stations, select or to go to the next or prev ious saved station, or press the corresponding number key to select the memory location of a station. To adjust the volume, press or . To listen to the radio using the loudspeaker, select Optio ns > Acti vate loudsp. . Warning : Listen to music at a modera te level. Contin uous e xposure to hi gh volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold th e device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To view available st ations based on location, select Option s > Station directory (network service). To save the curr ent tuned station to your station list, select Options > Save stat ion . To open the list of your saved stati ons, select Opti ons > Stations . See â Saved stations âÂÂ, p. 57 . To return to the standby m ode and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availability and costs, and to subscribe to the service, contact your network o perator or service provider. To view available visual co ntent for a tuned station, select or Options > Start visual service . If the visual service ID has not been save d for the station, enter it, or s elect Retrieve to search for it in the station direct ory (netw ork serv ice). When the connection to the vi sual service is establis hed, the display shows the current visual content designed by the content provider. To adjust displ ay setti ngs for the v isual con tent view, select Option s > Display settings > Lighting or Pwr. saver time-ou t . Saved stations You can save up to 20 radio stations in the radio. To open your statio n list, select Options > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Options > Station > Listen . To view available visual content for a station with Visual Radio service, select Options > Station > Start visual service . To change station details, select Options > Sta tion > Edit .
Radio 58 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Settings Select Options > Sett ings and from the following: Start-up ton e âÂÂSelect if a tone is played when the application is started. Auto-start se rvice âÂÂSelect Yes to have the Visual Radio service start auto matically when you select a saved statio n that offers visual service . Access point âÂÂSelect th e access point used for the data connection. You do not need an access point to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. Current region âÂÂSelect the region you are currently located in. This setting is displayed only if there was no network coverage when the application was started.
Calendar 59 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar Shortcut: Press any key ( â ) in any calendar view. A meeting entry opens , and the characters y ou enter are added to the Subject field. Tip! Regularly back up the information on the device to a compatible memory card. Y o u can restore the information, such as calendar entries, to the device later. See â Memory card tool âÂÂ, p. 5 . Create calendar entries 1 Press , and select Calendar > Options > New entry and from the following: Meeting âÂÂTo remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time. Memo âÂÂTo write a general entry for a day. Anniversary âÂÂTo remind you of birthdays or special dates. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. 2 Fill in the fields. Use to move between fields. Alarm (meetings and anniversaries)âÂÂSelect On , and press to fill in the Alarm time and Alarm date fields. in the day view indicates an alarm. Repeat âÂÂPress t o change the entry to be repeat ing ( is shown in the day view). Repeat until âÂÂYou can set an end date for the repeated entry. Synchronisati on : Private âÂÂAfter synchronisation, the calendar e ntry can be seen only by you and it is not shown to others with online access to view the calendar. Public âÂÂThe calendar entr y is shown to others who have access to view your calendar online. None âÂÂThe calendar en try is not copied to your compatible PC when you synchronise. 3 To save the entry, select Done . To stop a calen dar alarm, select Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. The remind er text stays on the screen. Sele ct Stop to end the calendar alarm. Select Snooz e to set the alarm to snooze.
Calendar 60 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tip! To send a calendar note to another compatible device, select Options > Send > Via text message , Via multim edia , Via Bluetooth , or Via e -mail (avail able o nly if t he co rrect e-mail settings are in place). Tip! You can move calendar and to-do data from many different Nokia phones to your device or synchronise your calendar and to-do notes to a compatible PC using Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Set a calendar alarm You can set an alarm to remind you of meetings and anniversaries. 1 Open an entry in which you want to set an alarm, and select Alarm > On . 2 Set the Alarm time and Alarm date . 3 Scroll do wn to Repeat , and press to select how often you want the alarm to be repeated. 4 Select Done . To delete a calendar alarm, open the entry in which you want to delete an alarm, an d select Alarm > Off . Calendar views Tip! Sele ct Options > Settings to change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calendar. In the month view, dates that have calendar entries are marked with a small tri angle in the right bottom corner. In the week view, memos and anniversaries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. Press to switch between the month view, the week view, and the day view. Icons in the day and week views: Memo and Anniversary . There is no icon for Me eting . Press to jump to today. To go t o a certain date, select Options > Go to date , write the date, and select OK . Delete calendar entries Deleting past entries in Calendar saves space in your device memory. To remove more than one event at a time, go to the month view, and select Options > Delete entry and one of the following: Before date âÂÂDeletes all calendar entries th at take place before a certain date you define. All entries âÂÂDeletes all calendar entries.
Calendar 61 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar settings To modify the Calendar alarm tone , Default view , Week starts on , and Week view title , select Options > Settin gs .
Web 62 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web Various service providers ma intain pages specifically designed for mobile devices. To access these pages, press , and select Web . These pages use the wireless markup language (WML), extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or hypertext ma rkup language (HTML). Check the availabi lity of servic es, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator or service provider. Service providers will also give yo u instructions on ho w to use their services. Shortcut : To start a connect ion, press and h old in the standby mode. Access the Web ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the Web page that you want to use. See â Receive browser settings âÂÂ, p. 62 or â Enter the settings manuallyâÂÂ, p. 62 . ⢠M ake a connection to the Web. See â Ma ke a connecti on âÂÂ, p. 63 . ⢠Start browsing the pages. See â Browse âÂÂ, p. 64 . ⢠E nd the connection to the Web. See â End a connecti on âÂÂ, p. 66 . Receive browser settings Tip! Settings may be available on the Web site of a network operator or service provider. You may receive Web service settings in a special text message from the network oper ator or service provider that offers the Web page. See â Data a nd settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Enter the settings manually Follow the instructions given to you by yo ur service provider. 1 Press , select Tools > Settin gs > Connection > Access points , and define the sett ings for an acce ss point. See â Connection settings âÂÂ, p . 87 . 2 Select Web > Opti ons > Bookmark manager > Add bookmark . Write a n ame for the bookmark and th e address of the page define d for the curren t access point. 3 To set the created access poi nt as the default access point in Web , selec t Web > Options > Settings > Access point .
Web 63 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Bookmarks view Glossary: A bookmark consists of an Internet address (mandatory), bookmark title, access point, and if the Web page requires, a us er name and password. Your device may have some bookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to acces s them, you should take the same precautions, for security or content, as you would with any Internet site. Icons in the bookmark view: The starting page defined for the defaul t access poin t. If you use another default access point for browsing, the starting page is changed accordingly. The automatic bookmarks fo lder contains bookmarks ( ) that are collected auto matically when you browse pages. The bookmarks in this folder are automatical ly orga nised acco rding to domai n. Any bookmark showing the title or Internet address of the bookmark. (If available) Folder th at contains bookmarks for downloading content. Add bookmarks manually 1 In the bookmarks view, select Options > Bookmark manager > Add bo okmark . 2 Start to fill in the fiel ds. Only the URL address must be defined. The default access point is assig ned to the bookmark if no other one is selected. Press to enter special characters s uch as / , ., : , an d @ . Press to clear cha racters. 3 Sele ct Options > Sa ve to save the bookmark. Send bookmarks Scroll to a bookmark , and select Optio ns > Se nd > Via text message . Press to send. It is po ssible to s end more than one bookmark at the same time. Make a connection After you store all the requir ed connection settings, you can access the pages. 1 Select a bookmark or enter the address in the field ( ) . When you enter the addres s, matching bookmarks are shown above the field. Press t o select a matching bookmark. 2 Press to start to download the pag e.
Web 64 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connection security If the security indicato r is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the Internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between the gate way and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. The service provi der secures th e data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Select Option s > Details > Security to view details about the connection, encryptions status, and information about server and user authentication. Security features may be required for some services, such as b anking serv ices. For such co nnections you need security certificates. For more information, contact your service provider. See also â Certificate management âÂÂ, p. 91 . Browse Important: Use only services that you tr ust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. On a browser page, new links appear underlined in blue and images that act as links have a blue border around them. To open a link, to check boxes, a nd make selections, press . Shortcut: Use to j ump to the end of a page and to the beginning of a page. To go to the previous page while browsing, select Back . If Back is not available, select Options > Navigation options > History to view a chronological list of the pages you have visited during a brow sing session. The history list is cleared each time a session is closed. To retrieve the latest cont ent from the server, select Options > Navi gation opti ons > Reload . To save a bookmark, select Options > Save as bookmark . Tip! To access the bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold . To return to the browser view, select Op tions > Back to page . To save a page while browsing, select Options > Advanc ed options > Save page . You can save pages to the device memory or a compatible me mory card (i f inserte d), and browse them when offline. To access the pages later, press in the bookmarks view to open the Saved pages view. To enter a new URL address, select Options > Navigation options > Go to we b address .
Web 65 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To open a sublist of commands or actions for the currently open page, select Options > Service options . You can download files that cannot be shown on the browser page, such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your device, for example, a downloaded image is saved in Gallery . Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, tran sferred or forwarded. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and pro tection against harmful software. Tip! Your browser collects bookmark s automatically while you browse Web pages. The bookmarks are stored to the automatic bookmarks fol der ( ) and automatically organised according to domain. See also â Web settings âÂÂ, p. 66 . View saved pages If you regularly browse pages containing inf o rmation that does not change very often, yo u can save and browse them when offline. In the saved pa ges view you ca n also create folders to store your saved browser pages. To open the saved pages view , press in the bookmarks view. In the saved pages view, press to open a saved page ( ). To save a page while browsing, select Options > Ad vanced options > Save page . To start a connection to the browser service and to download the latest ve rs ion of the page, select Options > Navigation options > Reload . The device stays online after you reload the page. Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and vide o clips. These i tems can be provided free, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respec tive applications in your device, for example, a downlo aded photo can be saved in Gallery . Important: Only install and use applications and other software fr om sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful sof t ware. 1 To download the item, scroll to the link, and press . 2 Select the appropriate option t o purchase the item, for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ.
Web 66 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 Carefully read all the information provided. To continue the download, select Accept . To cancel the download, select Cancel . Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), a nd other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. End a connection Select Options > Advanced options > Disconnect to end the connection and view the browser page offline , or Options > Exit to end the connection and close the browser. Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location that is used t o store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information re quiring passwo rds, empty the cache after each use. The info rmation or services you h a ve accessed are stored in the cache. T o empty the cache, select Op tions > Advanced options > Clear cache . Web settings Select Options > Setting s and from the following: Access point âÂÂTo change the default acc ess point, press to open a list of available access points. See â Connection settings âÂÂ, p. 87. Load imgs. & sounds âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to load images while browsing. If you select No , to load images later during browsing, select Options > Show images. Font size âÂÂTo choose the text size. Default enco ding âÂÂIf te xt character s are not shown correctly, you may choose an other encoding according to langua ge. Automatic bookmarks âÂÂTo disable automatic book mark collecting, select Off . If you want to continue collecting automatic bookmarks but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . Screen size âÂÂTo select what is sh o wn when you are browsing. Select Select. keys only or Full screen . Homepage âÂÂTo define the home page. Search page âÂÂTo define a Web page that is downloaded when you select Options > Navigation opti ons > Open search page in the bookmarks view, or when browsing.
Web 67 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Volume âÂÂIf you want the browser to play sounds embedded on Web pages, select a volume level. Rende ring âÂÂIf you want the page layout shown as accurately as possible, select By qua lity . If you do not want external cascading style sheets to be downloaded, select By speed . Cookies âÂÂTo enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Glossary: Cookies are a means of content providers to identify users and their preferences for frequently used content. Java/ECMA script âÂÂTo enable or disabl e the use of scripts. Security warnings âÂÂTo hide or show security notifications. Serial no. se nding âÂÂTo enable or disa ble serial number sending. Some service provid ers may require that you enable this function before Web browsing is possible. Conf. DTM F sending âÂÂChoose whether you want to confirm before the device sends DTMF tones during a voice call. See also â Option s duri ng a cal l âÂÂ, p. 14 .
My own 68 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own Games Press , and select My own and a game. For instructions on how to play the game, select Opti ons > Help . Music player Press , and select My own > Music . With the music player, you can play music f iles and create and listen to playlists. Shortcut : To start music player press in the standby mode. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to hi gh volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the de vice near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To view songs sort ed by their album or artist, select Albums or Artists . The album and artist information is collected from the ID3 tags of the song files, if avail able. To copy or move files to a compatible memory card or to device memory, select a file and Options > Organise > Copy to memory card / Move to memory card or Copy to phone mem. / Mo ve to phone mem. . Files stored on the memory card are indicated with . Copyright protections may prevent some music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Play music To play music, select All songs , Playlists, Artists, Album s , or Recently added and a song. The selected song and other songs in the view start to play. To open a view that displays information about the song that is currently playing, select Go to Now playing . To change between play and pause, press the scroll key. To fast forward in a s ong, pr ess and hold . To rewind, press and hold . To adjust the volume, press or . To start playing the next or previous song, press or .
My own 69 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To select between random play and normal play mode, select Options > Shuffle . To choose whether playing stops at the end of the playlist or restarts from the beginning of the playlist, selec t Option s > Repeat . To search for songs in a song list, press the number keys to enter letters in th e search box. To select several songs for playlists or deletion, press and hold while you press or . To delete songs, select th em, and press . Deleting a song removes it permanently fr om the memory card and the device memory. Playlists The music player supports .m3u simple playlists. Copy playlists with music files, or create them in the music player. To add songs, albums, or artists to a playlist, select the items and Options > Add to a playlist . You can create a new playlist or add to an existing one. To listen to a playlist, select Playlists and a playlist. To delete a playl ist, scroll t o it, and press . D eleting a playlist only deletes the playlist, not the music files. Go toâÂÂadd sho rtcuts Default shortcuts: opens Calendar , opens Inbox , and opens Notes . To store shortcuts (links to your favourite images, notes, bookmarks, and so on), press , and select My own > Go to . Shortcuts are added only from the individual applications. Not all applications hav e this function. 1 Select an item from an ap plication to which you want to add a shortcut. 2 Sele ct Option s > Add to 'Go to' . A shortcu t in Go to is automatically updated if y ou move the item to which it is pointing (for example, from one folder to another). To change the identifier in the lower left corner of the shortcut icon, select Options > Shortcut icon . Delete a shortcut Select the shortcut, and press . The default shortcuts Notes , Calendar , and Inbox cannot be deleted. When you remove an application or a document which has a shortcut in Go to , the shortcut icon of the removed item is dimmed in the Go to view. The shortcut can be deleted next time you start Go to .
My own 70 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. IMâÂÂinstant messaging (chat) Press , and select My own > IM . Instant messaging (network service) allows you to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service providers maintain IM servers that you can log in to after you register to an IM service. Select Conversatio ns to start or co ntinue a conversation with an IM use r; IM contacts to create, edit, or view the online status of your IM contacts; I M groups to start or continue a group conversation with multiple IM users; or Recorded chats to view a previous inst ant messaging session that you have sa ved. Note: Check the availability of chat services, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator and/ or service provider. Service providers will also giv e you instructions on how to use their services. Receive IM settings You must save the settings to access the service that you want to use. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the network ope rator or service provider that offers the IM ser vice. See â Data and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . You can also enter the settings manually. See â Chat server settings âÂÂ, p. 73 . Connect to an IM server Tip: To log in automatically when you start IM , select Op tions > Sett ings > Server settings > IM login type > On app. start-up . 1 Open IM to have your device co nnect to the IM server in use. To change the IM server in use and save new IM servers, see â Chat server settings âÂÂ, p. 73 . 2 Enter your user I D and pa ssword, and press to log in. You obtain the user ID and pa ssword fo r the IM server from your service provider. You can select Cancel to stay offline; to log in to the IM server later, select Option s > Login . You cannot send or receive me ssages while you are of fline. 3 To log out, select Options > Lo gout . Modify your IM settings Select Options > Setting s > IM settings and from the following: Use screen name (shown only if IM groups are supported by the server)âÂÂTo enter a nickname, select Yes . IM presence âÂÂTo allow others to see if you are online, select Active for al l .
My own 71 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Allow messa ges from âÂÂTo allow messages from all, select All . Allow invitations from âÂÂTo allow invitations only from your IM contacts, select IM contact s only . IM invitations are sent by IM contacts who wa nt you to join their groups. Msg. scrolling speed âÂÂTo select th e speed at which new messages are displayed. Sort IM contacts âÂÂTo sort your IM contacts Alphabetically or By online status . Availability reloading âÂÂTo choose how to update information about whether your IM contacts are online or offline, select Automati c or Manual . Search for IM groups and users To searc h for groups , in th e IM groups view, select Option s > Se arch . You can sear ch by Group name , T opic , and Members (u ser ID). To searc h for user s, in the IM cont acts view, select Option s > New IM contact > Search from server . You can search by User's name , User ID, Phon e number , and E-mail address . Join and leave an IM group To join an IM group that you have saved, scroll to the group, and press . To join an IM group not on th e list, but for which you know the group ID, select Options > Join ne w group . Enter the group ID, and press . To leave the IM group, select Option s > Leave IM group . Chat After you join an IM group, yo u can view th e messages that are exchanged there, and send your own messages. To send a message, write the mess age in the message editor field, and press . To send a private message to a participant, select Options > Se nd private msg. , select the recipient, write the message, and press . To reply to a private message sent to you, select the message and Option s > Reply . To invite IM contacts who are online to join the IM gro up, select Op tions > Send invit ation , select the contacts you want to invite, write the invi tati on message, and press . To prevent receiving messages from certain participants, select Options > Blocking options and the desired option.
My own 72 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Record chats To record to a file the messages th at are exchanged during a conversation or while you are joined in a IM group, select Options > Record chat , enter a na me for the conversation file, and press . To stop recording, select Options > Stop recording . The recorded conversation files are automatically saved in Recorded chats . To view the recorded chats, in the main view, select Recorded chats , select the conversation, and press . View and start conversations Go to the Co nversations view to see a list of the indiv idual conversation participants that you have an ongoing conversa tion with. To view a conversation, scro ll to a participant, and press . To continue the conversation, write your message, and press . To return to the conversations list without closing the conversation, sel ect Back . To close the conversation, select Opti ons > End conversation . Ongoing conversations are automatically closed when you exit IM . To start a new c onversation, select Opt ions > New conversation and from the following: Select recipient âÂÂTo se e a list of your chat contacts that are currently online. Scroll to the contact that y ou want to start a conversation with, and press . Enter use r ID âÂÂTo enter the user ID of the user you want to start a conversation with, and press . Glossary: Th e user ID is provided by the ser vice provider to those who register to this service. To save a conversation partic ipant to your IM contacts, scroll to the part icipant , and selec t Options > Add to IM contacts . To send automatic replies to incoming messages, select Options > Se t auto reply on . Enter the text , and select Done . You can still receive messages. IM contacts Go to the IM contacts to retrieve chat contact lists from the server, or to add a new chat contact to a contact list. When you log in to the server, the previously used chat contact list is retrieved from the server automatically.
My own 73 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Manage IM groups Go to the IM groups view to see a list of the IM groups that you have saved or are currently joined to. Chat server settings Select Options > Sett ings > Server sett ings . You may receive the se ttings in a special text message from the network operator or service provider that o ffers the chat service. You obtain the user ID and password from your service provider when you register to the service. If you do not know your user ID or pa ssword, contact your servic e provider. To change the IM server to which you wish to connect, select Default server . To add a new server to your list of I M servers, select Servers > Options > New server . Enter the following settings: Server name âÂÂEnter the name for the chat server. Access point in use âÂÂSelect the access point you want to use for the server. Web address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the IM server. User ID âÂÂEnter your user ID. Password âÂÂEnter your login password.
Connectivity 74 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity Bluetooth connectivity You can connect wirelessly to other compatible devices with Bluetooth wireless technology. Compatible devi ces may include mobile phones, co mputers, and enhancements such as hea dsets and car kits. You can use Bluetooth wireless technology to send images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes; to connect wirelessly to your compatible PC (for example, to transfer files); or to connect to a compatible printer to print images with Image print . See â Image print âÂÂ, p. 35 . Since devices with Bluetooth wireless technology communicate using radio waves, your device and the other device do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within 10 metres (32 feet) of each other, although the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions su ch as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following profiles: Basic Printing Profile, Generic Access Profile, Seri al Port Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, Headset Profile, Handsfree Pro file, Generic Object Exchange Profile, Object Push Profile, File Transfer Profile, Basic Imaging Profile, and Human Interface Device Profile. To ensure interoperabilit y between other devices supporting Bluetooth wireless technology, use Nokia approv ed enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Glossary: A profile corresponds to a se rvi ce or a function, and defines how different devices connect . For example the Handsfree Profile is used between the handsfree device and the mobile device. For devices to be compatible, they must support the same profiles. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth wireless technology in some lo cation s. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features using Bluetooth wire less technology, or allowing such features to run in th e background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, you cannot use B luetooth connectivity. See â Security âÂÂ, p. 90 for more in formation on locking the device.
Connectivity 75 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Bluetooth connectivity settings Press , and select Connec t. > Bluetoot h . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. After you set Bluetooth connectivity on and change My phone's visibil ity to Shown to all , your device and this name can be seen by other users with devices using Bluetooth wireless technology. Select from the following: Bluet ooth âÂÂSelect On or Off . To connect wirelessly to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth connectivity On , and then establish a connection. My phone's visibility âÂÂTo allow your device to be found by other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology, select Shown to all . To hide it from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's na me âÂÂEdit the name of your device. Security tips When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, set Bluetooth Off , or select My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with an unknown device. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity There can be se veral active Bluetooth connections at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. Bluetooth connectivity indicators ⢠W hen is shown in the standby mode, a Bluetooth connecti on is act ive. ⢠When is blinking, your device is trying to connect to the other devi ce. ⢠When is shown c ontinuo usly, the B luetooth connecti on is act ive. Tip! To send text using Bluetooth connectivity (instead of text messages), open Notes , write the text, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . 1 Open an application where the item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to anothe r compatible device, open Gallery . 2 Select the item (for example, an image) and Opt ions > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that ar e within ra nge start to appear on the display one by one. You can see a device icon, the name of the device, the device type, or a short name.
Connectivity 76 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tip! If you hav e searched for devices earl ier, a list of the devices that were found previously is shown first. To start a new search, select More devi ces . If yo u switch off the device, the list is cleared. Device icons: âÂÂComputer; âÂÂPhone; âÂÂAudio or vid eo; â Headset; âÂÂOther. To interrupt the search, press Stop . The device list freezes. 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a pass code. See â Pair devices âÂÂ, p. 76 . 5 When the connection has been established, Se nding data is shown. The Sent fold er in Messaging does not store messages sent using Bluetooth conn ectivity. Tip! When searching for device s, some devices may show only the unique addr esses (device addresses). To find the unique address of your device, enter the code *#2820# in the standby mode. Pair devices Glossary: Pairing means authenti cation. The users of the two devices with Blueto oth wireless technology should agree on a common passcode, and use the same passcode for both devices in order to pair them. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. In the Bluetoot h main view, press to open the paired devices view ( ). Before pairin g, create you r own passcode (1âÂÂ16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. The passcode is used only once. To pair with a device, select Option s > New paired device . Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that are within range start to appear on the displ ay one by one. Select the device , and en ter the passc ode. T he same pa sscode must be entered on the other device as well. After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices view. Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. Tip! To define a short name (nickname or alias) for a paired device, scroll to the device, and select Options > Assign shor t name in the paired devices view. This name helps you to recognise a certain device during device se arch or when a devic e requests a connection.
Connectivity 77 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. To set a device t o be authoris ed or unaut horise d, scroll to a device, select Options and from the following: Set as authorised âÂÂConnections between your device and this device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorised devices in the paired devices view . Set as unauthorise d âÂÂConnection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Option s > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings, select Option s > Delete all . Tip! If you are curren t ly connected to a devic e and delete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately, and the connection is switched off. Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data using Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are a sked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messagi ng . Message s received using Bluetooth conne ctivity are indicated by . See â InboxâÂÂreceive messages âÂÂ, p. 46 . Switch off Bluetooth connectivity To switch off Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off . PC connections You can use your device with a variety of PC connectivity and data communications applications. With Nokia PC Suite you ca n synchronise contacts, calendar, and to-do notes, and transfer images between your device and a compatible PC. Always create the connection from the PC to synchronise with your devi ce. For further information on how to install Nokia PC Suite (compatible with Windows 2000 and Windows XP), see the user guide for Nokia PC Suite and the Nok ia PC Suite help in the "Install" section on the CD-ROM.
Connectivity 78 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. CD-ROM The CD-ROM should launch after you have inserted it into the CD-ROM drive of a compatible PC. If not, proceed as follows: Open Windows Explorer, right-click the CD-ROM drive where you inserted the CD-ROM, and se lect Autoplay. Your device as a modem You can use your device as a modem to send and receive e-mail, or to connect to the Internet with a compatible PC by using Bluetooth connectiv ity or a compatible data cable. Detailed installation inst ructions can be found in the user guide for Nokia PC Suite in Modem options on the CD-ROM. Tip! When using Nokia P C Suite for the first time, to connect your device to a compatible PC and to use Nokia PC Suite, use the Get Connected wiz ard available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Connection manager You may have multiple data connections active at the same time when you are using your device in GSM networks. Press , and select Connect. > Con n. mgr. to view the status of multiple data connections, view details on the amount of data sent and received, and end connections. When you open Conn. mgr. , you can see the following: ⢠Open data connections: da ta calls ( ) and packet data connections ( ) ⢠The statu s of each co nnection ⢠The amount of data uploaded and downloaded for each connection (shown for packet data connections only) ⢠The duration of each conne ction (shown for dat a calls only) Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To end a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Options > Disconnec t . To close all currently open connections, select Options > Disconnect all .
Connectivity 79 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. View data connection details To view the details of a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Options > Details . Name âÂÂThe name of the Internet access point (I AP) in use, or the modem connection name if the connection is a dial-up connection. Bearer âÂÂThe type of data connection: Data call , High sp. GSM , or Packet data . Status âÂÂThe current status of the connection: Connec ting , Conn.(in act.) , Conn.(active) , On hold , Disconnctng. , o r Disconnected . Rece ived âÂÂThe amount of data, in bytes, received to your device. Sent âÂÂThe amount of data, in bytes, sent from your device. Duration âÂÂThe length of time that the connection has been open. Speed âÂÂThe current speed of both sending and receiving data in kilobytes per second. Dial-up âÂÂThe dial-up number used. Name âÂÂAccess point name used. Shared (not shown if the connection is not shared)âÂÂThe number of applications using the same connectio n. Remote synchronisation Press , and select Connect. > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronise your notes, ca lendar, and contacts with various calendar and address book applications on a compatible computer or on the Internet. The synchronisation applicatio n uses SyncML technology for synchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the supplier of the calendar or address book application you want to synchronise your data with. You may receive syncronisation settings in a special text message. See â Data and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . Create a new syn chronisation profile 1 If no profiles have been define d, your device asks if you want to create a new profile. Select Yes . To create a new profile in addition to existing ones, select Option s > New sync pro file . Choose whether you wa nt to us e the defau lt setting values or copy the values from an existing profil e to be used as the basis for the new profile. 2 Define the following: Sync profile name âÂÂWrite a descriptive n ame for the profile.
Connectivity 80 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Data bearer âÂÂSelect the connection type: Web , or Bluetooth . Access point (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web )âÂÂSelect an access point to use for the data connecti on. Host address âÂÂThe IP address of the host server. Contact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. Port (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web )â Contact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. User name âÂÂYour user ID for the synchronisation server. Contact your service pr ovider or system administrator for your correct ID. Password âÂÂWrite your password. Contact your service provider or system administr ator for the correct value. Allow sync r equests âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to allow the server to start a synchronisation. Accept all sync reqs. âÂÂSelect No if you want your device to ask you before a sy nchronisation initialised by the server is started. Network au thentic. (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web )âÂÂSelect Yes to enter a network user name and password. Press to view the user name and password fields. Press to select Contacts , Cale ndar , or Notes . ⢠Select Yes if you want to synchronise the selected database. ⢠In Remote database , enter a correct path to the remote calendar, address boo k, or notes database on the server. ⢠Select Synchronisation type : Normal (two-way synchronisation) , To server only , or To phon e only . 3 Select Bac k to save the settings and return to the main view. Synchronise data In the Sync main view, you can see the different synchronisat ion profiles and the kind of data to be synchronised. 1 Select a synchronisation profile and Options > Synchronise . The status of the synchronisation is shown at the bottom of the screen. To cancel synchronisation be fore it finishe s, select Cancel . 2 You are notified when the sy nchronisation is complete. After synchronisation is complete, select Options > View log to open a log file showing the sync hronisation status ( Comple te or Incomplete ) and how many calendar or contact entries, or notes have been added, updated, deleted, or disc ar ded (not synchro nised) in your device or on the server.
Connectivity 81 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Device manager Press , and select Connec t. > Dev. mgr. . You may receive server profiles and differ ent configuration settings from your network operator, service provi der, or company information management department. These configura tion settings may include a ccess point settings for da ta connections and other settings used by different applications in your device. To connect to a server and receive configuration settings for your device, scroll to a profile, and select Opt ions > Start configuration . To allow or deny receiv ing of configuration settings from service providers, select Option s > Enable config. or Disable config. . Server profile settings Contact your service provider for th e co rrect settings. Server name âÂÂEnter a name for the configuration server . Server ID âÂÂEnter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. Server password âÂÂE nter a password to identify your device to the server. Access point âÂÂSelect an access p oin t to be used when connecting to the ser ver. Host address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the server. Port âÂÂEnter the port number of the ser ver. User name and Password âÂÂEnter your user name and passwo rd. Allow config uratio n âÂÂTo receive configuration settings from the server, select Yes . Auto-accept all reqs. âÂÂIf you want your device to ask for confirmation before acceptin g a configuration from the server, select No .
Office 82 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Office Calculator To add, substract, multiply, divide, calculate sq uare roots and percentages, press , and selec t Office > Calculator . Note: This calculator has limited acc uracy and is designed for simple calculations. To save a number in the memory (indicat ed by M ), select Op tions > Memory > Save . To retrieve a number in memory, select Options > Memory > Re call . To clear a number in memory, select Optio n s > Memory > Clear . Calculate percentage s 1 Enter a number for which you want to calculate a percentage. 2 Select , , , or . 3 Enter the percentage. 4 Select . Converter To convert measures such as Lengt h from one unit ( Yards ) to another ( Metres ), press , and select Office > Converte r . Note that Converter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. 1 Scroll to the Type field, and press to open a list of measures. Scro ll to the measure you wa nt to use, and select OK . 2 Scroll to the first Unit field, and press . Select the unit from which you want to convert and OK . Scroll to the next Unit field, and select the unit to which you want to convert. 3 Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Press to add a decimal and for the , - (for tempe rature), and E (exponent) symbols. Tip! To change the conversion order, enter the value in the second Amount field. The result is shown in the first Amount field.
Office 83 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Set base currency an d exchange rates Before you can make currency convers ions, you need to choose a base curre ncy and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency determines th e conversion rates of the other currencies. 1 Select Converter > Options > Currency rates . A list of currencies opens, and you can see the current base currency at the top. Tip! To rename a currency, go to the currency rates view, scroll to the currency, and select Options > Rename currency . 2 To change the base currency , scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base curr . . 3 Add exchange rates. Scroll to the currency, and enter a new rate, that is, how many units of the curr ency equal one unit of the base currency you have selected. After you have inserted all the ne cessary exchange rates, you can make currency convers ions. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter the new r ates because all previously set exchange rates are set to zero. To-do Press , and select Office > To-do to write notes and maintain a task list. To add a note, press any key to st art to write the task in the Subject field. To set the due date for the task, scroll to the Due date field, and enter a date. To set the priority for the To-do note, scroll to the Priority field, and press to select the priority. The priority icons are ( High ) and ( Low ). There is no icon for Normal . To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the To-do list, and select Options > Mark as done . To restore a task, scroll to it in the To-do list, and select Options > Mark as not done .
Office 84 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Notes Press , and select Office > Notes to write notes. You can send notes to other compatible devices and save pla in text files (.txt format) that you receive to Notes . Recorder Press , and select Office > Recorder to record telephone conversations and voice memos. If you are recording a telephone conversation, both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording.
Tools 85 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools Settings To change settings, press , and select Tools > Settings . Scroll to a setting group, and press to open it. Scroll to a setting you want to change, and press . Phone settings General Phone language âÂÂChanging the langua ge of the display texts in your device also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language accord ing to the information on your SIM card. After you change the display text language, the device restarts. Changing the settings for Phone languag e or Writing language affects every ap plication in your device, and the change remains effective unt il you change these settings again. Writing language âÂÂChanging the language affects the charac ters and special cha rac ters available w hen writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Dictionary âÂÂYou can set the predictive text input On or Off for all editor s in the device. The predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. Welcome note or logo âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch o n the device. Sele ct Default to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note (up to 50 letters ), or Image to select a photo or picture from Gallery . Orig. phone settings âÂÂYou can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. See â Phone and SIM âÂÂ, p. 90 . After res etting, the device may take a longer time to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Standby mode Active standby âÂÂUse shortcuts to applications in the standby mode on the main display. See â Active standby mode âÂÂ, p. 10 .
Tools 86 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Left sele ction key âÂÂTo assign a shortcut to the left selection key ( ) in the standby mode, select an application from the list. Right selection key âÂÂTo assign a shortcut to the right selection key ( ) in the standby mode, select an application from the list. Active standby apps. âÂÂTo select the application shortcuts you want to appear in the active standby. This setting is only available if Active standby is on. You can also assign keypad shortc uts for the different presses of the scroll key, by selecting an applicat ion from the list. These scroll key shortc uts are not available if the active standby is on. Operator logo âÂÂThis setting is visible only if you have received and saved an operato r logo. You can choose if you want the operator logo to show or not. Display Brightness âÂÂYou c an change the brightness of the displ ay to lighter or darker. The br ightness o f the display is automatically adjusted according to the environment. Pwr. saver time-out âÂÂThe power saver on the display is activated when the timeout period is over. Light ti me-out âÂÂSelect a time-out after wh ich the backlight of the main display is switched off. Call settings Se nd m y c al le r I D âÂÂYou can set your phone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your network operator or service provider wh en you make a subscri ption ( Set by netw ork ) (network service). Call waiting âÂÂIf you have activated call waiting (network service), the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. Select Activate to request the network to activate call waiting, Cancel to request the network to deac tiv ate call waiting, or Check status to check if the function is active or not. Reject call with SMS âÂÂSelect Yes to send a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the call. See â Answer or reject a call âÂÂ, p. 13 . Message text âÂÂWrite a text to be sent in a text message when you reject a call. Automatic redial âÂÂSelect On , and your devic e makes a maximum of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic redialing, press . Summary after call âÂÂActivate this setting if you want the device to briefly display the approximat e duration of the last call.
Tools 87 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Speed dialling âÂÂSelect On , and the numbers assigned to the speed dialing keys ( â ) can be dialed by pressing and holding the key. See also â Speed dial a phone number âÂÂ, p. 12 . Anykey answer âÂÂSelect On , and you can a nswer an incoming call by briefly pressing any keypa d key, except , , , and . Line in use âÂÂThis setting (network servic e) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which p hone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Call s on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have no t subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown i n the standby mode. Tip! To switch between the phone lines, press and hold in the standby mode. Line change âÂÂTo prevent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Connection settings Data connections and access points Your device supports packet da ta connections ( ), such as GPRS in the GSM network. Glossary: General packet radio service (GPR S) uses packet data technology wher e information is sent in short packets of data over the mobile network. To establish a data connection, an access point is r e quired. You can define different kinds of access points, such as: ⢠MMS access point to send and rec eive multimedia messages ⢠Access point for the Web application to view WML or XHTML pages ⢠I nternet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-ma il Check the type of access point you need with your service provider for the service you want to acc ess. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your network opera tor or service provider.
Tools 88 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Packet data conne ctions in GSM networks When you use your devi ce in GSM n etworks, mu ltiple d ata connections can be active at the same time and access points can s hare a data connection. To check the active data connections, see â Connection manager âÂÂ, p. 78 . The following indicators may be displayed below the signal indicator, depending on which network you use: GSM network, packet data is available in the network. GSM network, packet data connecti on is active, data is being transferred. GSM network, multiple packet da ta connections are active. GSM network, packet da ta connection is on hold. (This can happen during a voice call, for example.) Receive access point setti ngs You may receive access point settings in a text message from a service provider, or you may have preset access point settings in your device. See â D ata and settings âÂÂ, p. 46 . To create a new access point, press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . An access point may be protected ( ) by your network operator or service provider. Protected access points cannot be edited or deleted. Access points Tip! See also â Receive MMS and e-mail settings âÂÂ, p. 45 , â E-mail âÂÂ, p. 53 , and â Access the We b âÂÂ, p. 62 . Follow the instructions given to you by yo ur service provider. Connection name âÂÂGive a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer âÂÂDepending on the data connection you select, only cert ain setting fiel ds are availab le. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have bee n instructed otherwise by your service provider. To be able to use a data connection, the ne twork service provider must support this fe ature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Access point name (for packet data only)âÂÂThe access point name is needed to establish a connection to the packet data network. You obta in the access point name from your network operator or service provider. User name âÂÂThe user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. The user name is of ten case-sensitive. Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter a new password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes .
Tools 89 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Password âÂÂA password may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. The password is often case-sensitive. Authentication âÂÂS elect Normal or Secure . Homepage âÂÂDepending on what you are setting up, write the Web address or the address of the multimedia messaging center. Select Options > Advan ced settin gs to change the following settings: Network type âÂÂSelect the Internet protocol type to use: IPv4 settings or IPv6 settings . The other settings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP address (for IPv4)âÂÂEnter the IP address of your device. Name servers âÂÂIn Primary name server: , enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. In Second. name server: , enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your Internet servic e p rovider to obtain these addresses. Glossary: The domain name service (DNS) is an Internet service that tr anslates domain names s uch as www.nokia-asia.com into IP addresses like 192.100.124.195. Proxy serv. address âÂÂDefine the address for the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connectio n. Packet data conn. âÂÂIf you se lect When available an d you are in a network that suppor ts packet data, the device registers to the packet data network. Also, starting an active packet data connection is qui cker (for example, to send and receive e-mail). If you select When nee ded , the device uses a packet data connection only if you start an applica tion or action that n eeds it. If there is no packet data coverage an d you select W hen available, the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. Access point âÂÂThe access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to your computer. Configurations You may receive trusted server settings f rom your network operator or service provider in a configuration message, or the settings may be stored on your SIM card. You can save these settings to your device, view or delete them in Configurations .
Tools 90 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Date and time See â Clock settings âÂÂ, p . 3 . See also the language settings in â General âÂÂ, p. 85 . Security Phone and SIM PIN code request âÂÂWhen active, the code is requested each time the device is sw itched on. Deactivating the personal identification numbe r (PIN) code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. See â Glossary of PIN and lock codes âÂÂ, p. 91 . PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code âÂÂYou can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . See â Glossary of PIN and lock codes âÂÂ, p. 91 . Avoid using access co des similar to t he emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. Autolock period âÂÂYou can set an autolock period, a time-out after which the devi ce automat ically locks and can be used only if the correc t lock code is entered. Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select None to turn off the autolock period. To unlock the device, enter the lock code. When the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device. Tip! To lock the device manually, press . A list of commands opens. Sele ct Lock phone . Lock if SIM changed âÂÂYou can set the device to ask for the lock code w hen an un known SIM card is ins erted into your device. The device maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Closed user group âÂÂYou can specify a group of people to whom you can cal l and who can call y ou (network serv ice). When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM se rvices âÂÂYou can set the device to display confirmatio n messages when you are usin g a SIM card service (network service).
Tools 91 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Glossary of PIN and lock codes If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification num ber (PIN) codeâÂÂThis cod e protects your SIM card against u n authorized use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the PIN code is blocked, and you need to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. S ee the information about the PUK code in this section. PIN2 codeâÂÂThis code (4 to 8 digit s) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in yo ur device. Lock code (also known as security code)âÂÂThis code (5 digits) can be used to lock the device to avoid unauthorized use. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorized use of your devic e, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate fr om your device. Personal unblocking key (PUK) code and PUK2 codeâÂÂThese codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the op erator whose SIM card is in your device. Certificate management Digital certificates do not guar antee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. Glossary: Digital certificates are used to verify the origin of the XHTML or WML pages and installed software. However, they ca n only be trusted if the origin of the cert ificate is known to be authentic. In the certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority certificates th at are stored in your device. Press to see a list of personal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferr i ng confidential information. They should also be used if yo u want to reduce the risk of viruses or oth er malicious software and be su re of the authenticity of software wh en downloading and installing software.
Tools 92 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain co rrect, authentic, or trusted certificates for in c reased security to be available. If Expired certi f icate or Certif icate no t valid yet is shown even if the certificate sh ould be valid, check that the current date and time in your device a re correc t. View certificat e detailsâÂÂcheck authen ticity You can only be sure of the correct id entity of a server when the signature and the peri od of validity of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified on the device display if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Op tions > Certificate d etails . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: ⢠Certif icate not t rusted âÂÂYou have not set any application to use the certificat e. See â Change the trust settings âÂÂ, p. 92 . ⢠Expire d certi ficate âÂÂThe period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certif icate n ot valid y et âÂÂThe period of validity has not yet begun for the selected cer tificate. ⢠Certif icate co rrupte d âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificat e issuer. Change the t rust settin gs Before changing a ny certificate settings , you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Options > Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certi ficate is shown. For example: ⢠Symbian installa tion : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet : Yes âÂÂThe ce rtificate is able to certify servers. ⢠App. installation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java application. ⢠Online certif. check âÂÂSelect to check the online certificates before in stalling an application. Select Options > Edit trust s etting to change the value.
Tools 93 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Call diverting Call d ivert a l l o w s y o u t o d i v e r t y o u r i n c o m i n g c a l l s t o y o u r voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. 1 Press , and select Tools > Settings > Call diver t . 2 Select which calls you want to divert: Voice calls , Data calls , or Fax calls . 3 Select the desired divert option. To divert voice calls when your number is busy or when you r eject incoming calls, select If busy . 4 Set the divert option on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is activated ( Check s tatus ). Several divert options can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring and call di verting cannot be active at the same time. Call barring Call barring (network service) allows you to restric t the calls that you make or receive with the device. To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Acti vate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is active ( Check sta tus ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Call barring and call di verting cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. Network Your device uses the GSM network. The GSM ne twork is indicated with in the standby mod e. Operator selec tion âÂÂSelect Automatic to set the device to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list of networks. If th e connectio n to the manuall y select ed network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home netw ork, that is, the operator whose SIM card is in your device. Glossary: A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers.
Tools 94 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Cell info display âÂÂSelect On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microc ellular network (MCN) technology and t o activate cell info reception. Enhancement settings Indicators shown in the standby mode: A headset is connected. A loopset is connected. The headset is u navailable, or Bluetooth connectivity to a headset is lost. Select Headset , Loopset , or Bluetooth han dsfree , and t he following options are available: Default profile âÂÂto set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain enhancement to your device. See â ProfilesâÂÂset tones âÂÂ, p. 8 . Automatic ans wer âÂÂto set the device to answer an incoming call automatically afte r 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer is disabled. Voice commands You can use voice commands to control your device. For more information about the enhanced voice commands supported by your device, see â Voice dialing âÂÂ, p. 12 . To activate enhanced vo ice commands for starting applications or profiles, you must open the Voice com. application and its Pro file s folder. Press , and select Tools > Voice com. > Profiles ; the device creates voice tags for the applications an d profiles. To use enhanced voice commands , press and hold and say a voice command. The voice command is the n ame of the application or profile displayed in the list. To add more applications to the list, select Options > New application . To add a second voice command that can be used to start the application, scroll to it, select Options > Change command , and enter the new voice command as text. Avoid very short names, abbreviations, and acronyms. To change voice command settings, select Options > Settings . To switch off the s ynthesizer tha t plays recognised voice tags and commands in the selected device language, sele ct Synt hesise r > Off . To reset voice recognition learning, for examp le, when the main user of the device has c hanged, select Reset voice adapts. .
Tools 95 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Application manager Press , and select Tools > Manager . You can install tw o types of applications and software to your device: ⢠J2ME⢠applications based on Java⢠technology with the extension .jad or .jar ( ). ⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system ( ). The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install software specifically designed for your Nokia N72. Software providers will often refer t o the official model number of this product: the Nokia N72-5. Install ation file s may be transf erred to your device fr om a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using Bluetoot h connectivity. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nok ia PC Suite to install an application to your device or a compatible memory card. If you use Microsoft Windows Explor er to transfer a file, save the file to a compatible memory card (local disk). Example: If you have received the installation file as an e-mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e-mail, open the attachments view, scroll to the installation file, and pres s to start installation. Install applications and software Tip! You can also use Nokia Application Installer available in Nokia PC Suite to install applications. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Application icons are as follows: .sis application; Java application; applicatio n is not fully install ed; application is installed on a memory card. Important: Only install and use applications and other software fr om sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful sof t ware. Before installation, note the following: ⢠To view the application type, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer o f the application, select Options > View details . ⢠To display the secu rity certificat e details of the application, select Options > View certificate . See â Certificate management âÂÂ, p. 91. ⢠If you install a file that cont ains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you ha ve the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To resto re the original application, remove the application, and install the application again from the original installation fi le or the back-up copy.
Tools 96 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠The .jar file is required fo r installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it . If there is no access point defined for the application, you are aske d to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufactur er of the application. 1 Open Manager , and scroll to an installation file. Alternatively, search the device memory or a memory card in File mgr. , or open a message in Me ssaging > Inbox that c ontai ns an installation file. Select the applicatio n, and press to start the installation. Tip! While bro wsing, you can download an installation file and inst all it without c losing the connection. 2 Select Options > Install . During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the app lication. To start an installed application, locate it in the menu, and p ress . To start a network connection and to view extra information about the application, sc roll to it, and s elect Options > Go to web address , if available. To see what software packag es have been installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . To send your install ation log to a help desk so that they can see what has been installed or removed, select Options > Send log > Via text message , Via multimedia , Via Bluetooth , or Via e-mail (availa ble only if the co rrect e-mail settings are in place). Remove applications and software Scroll to a software pack age, and select Opt ions > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, y ou can only reinstall it if you have the original software pack age or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents create d with t hat softwar e. Note: If another s oftware package depe nds on the software package tha t you removed, the othe r software package ma y stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details.
Tools 97 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Application settings Select Options > Sett ings and from the following: Software installat ion âÂÂSelect if Symbian software can be installed: On , Signed only , or Off . Online certif. check âÂÂSelect to check the online certificates before in stalling an applicatio n. Default web address âÂÂSet the default address used when checking online certificates. Some Java applications may require a phone call, a message to be sent, or a network connection to a specif ic access point for downloading ex tra data or components. In the Manager main view, scroll to an application, and select Options > Suite settings to change settings related to that specific application. Activation keysâÂÂhandle copyright-protected files Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Press , and select Tools > Activation ke ys to view the digital rights activation ke ys stored in your device: ⢠Valid keys ( ) are connected to one or more media files. ⢠W ith expired keys ( ), you have no time to use the media file, or the time pe riod for using the file is exceeded. To view the Expi red activation keys, pres s . To buy more usage time or extend the usage period for a media file, select an a ctivation key an d Options > Activate content . Activation keys cannot be updated if Web service message reception is disabled. See â Web service messages âÂÂ, p. 54 . To view which keys are not in use at the moment ( Not used ), press twice. Unused activation keys have no media files connected to them saved in the device. To view detailed information such as the validity status and ability to send the file, se lect an activation key, a nd pres s .
Troubleshooting 98 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Troubleshooting Q&A Bluetooth connectivity Q: Why ca nâÂÂt I find my frien dâÂÂs device? A: Check that both devices have activated Bluetooth connectivity. Check that the distance bet ween the two device s is not over 10 metres (32 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Check that the other device is not in hidden mode. Check that both devices are compatible. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end Bluetooth connectivity? A: If another device is connect ed to your device, you can either end the connection usin g the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Pres s , and select Connect. > Bluetooth > Bluet ooth > Off . Multimedia me ssaging Q: What should I do when th e device cannot rec eive a multimedia message because memory is full? A: The amount of me mory needed i s indicated in the error message: Not enough memory to retrieve message. Delete some data first. To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the differe nt data groups consume, press , and select Tools > File mgr. > Options > Memory details . Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging centre. Check th at the setti ngs for multimedia messaging are defined correctly and that ther e are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Q: How can I end the data conne ction when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: To stop the device from making a data connection, press , and select Messaging > Options > Setting s > Multim edia me ssage . To i gnore all incoming multimedia messages, select Multimed ia retrieval > Off . After this change, the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messaging.
Troubleshooting 99 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact? A: The contact card may not have a phone number o r an e-mail address. Add the missi ng information to the contact card in Contacts . Entries that are saved only on the SIM card are not shown in the contacts directory. To copy contacts from the SIM card to Contacts , see â Copy contacts âÂÂ, p. 18 . Camera Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection window is clean. Calendar Q: Why are the week numbers missing? A: If you have ch anged the calend ar sett ings so that th e week starts on a day other than Monday, the week numbers are not shown. Browser services Q: What do I do if the following message is displaye d: No valid access point define d. Define one in Web settings. ? A: Insert the correct browser se ttings. Contact yo ur service provider for instructions. Log Q: Why does the log appear empt y? A: You may have activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filter have been logged. To see all events, press , and select My own > Log . Scroll to the Log tab, and select Options > Filter > All communication . Q: How do I delete my log information? A: To clear the log, pres s , and select My own > Log . Scroll to the Log tab, and select Options > Clear log . To erase the log contents, recent calls register, and message delivery reports permanently, press , and select My own > Log > Options > Settings > Log durati on > No log . PC connec tivity Q: Why do I have problems in conn ecting the device to my PC? A: Make sure that Nokia PC S uit e is installed and runni ng on your compatible PC. See the user guide for Nokia PC Suite on the CD-ROM. If Nokia PC Su ite is i nstalled and running, you can use Nokia Get connected wiz ard available in Nokia PC Suite to connect to your PC. For further information on how to use Nokia PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia PC Suite or visit the support pages at www.nokia-asia.com.
Troubleshooting 100 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Access codes Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes ? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact yo ur network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for example, a commercial Internet service provider (ISP), service provider, or network operator. Application not resp onding Q: How do I close an application that is no t responding? A: Open the application s witching window by pressing and holding . Then scroll to the application, and press to close the application. Display Q: Why do missing, discoloure d, or bright dots appear on t he screen every time I turn on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Memory l ow Q: What can I do if my device memory is low? A: You can delete the following items regularly to avoid memory gett ing low: ⢠Messages from In box , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messaging ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages from the device memory ⢠Saved browser pages ⢠Images and photos in Galler y To delete contact information, calendar notes , call timers, call cost timers, game scores, or any other data, go to the respective application to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and any of the fol lowing notes are shown: Not enough memory to perform operation . Delete some da ta first. or Memory lo w. Delete so me data. , try deleting items one by one (starting from the smallest item). Q: How can I save my data before deleting it? A: Save your data using one of the following methods: ⢠Use Nokia PC Suite to make a back up copy of all data to a compatible computer . ⢠Send images to your e-mail add ress, and then s ave the images to your computer. ⢠Send data using Bluetooth co nnectivity to a compatible device. ⢠Store data on a compatible memory card.
Battery information 101 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Battery information Charg ing and di sc hargi ng Your device is powered by a recharge able batt ery. The batt ery can be charged and dis c harged hund reds of t ime s, but it w ill event u ally wear out. When th e t a lk and st an dby t imes are not iceably shorte r t h an normal, replace the batt ery. Us e o n ly N o k ia app rove d ba tt er ies, an d re ch arge your batt ery only with Nokia approved char g e rs designated for th is de v ic e . If a replacement bat tery is be ing used for t h e first t ime or if the bat tery has not bee n us ed fo r a prol onge d peri od, i t may be n e cessa ry to co nn ect t h e ch arger and then disconne c t and reconn ect it to begin ch a rging th e ba ttery. Unpl ug the charger from the e lec trical plug and the de v ice when not in us e. Do not le ave a fully charge d batt ery co nn ected to a ch arge r, si nce overc h arging may shorte n its lifeti m e. If left unus e d, a full y charged batte ry will los e it s c h arge ov e r ti me . If the b a ttery i s complet ely di scharged, it may take a fe w mi nutes befo re t h e charging i n dicator appears o n the d isplay or be fore any cal ls can be made . Use the b a ttery o n ly for it s i n te nde d purpose . Never use any c h arger or batt ery th at is damaged. Do n o t sh o rt- ci rc ui t th e b a tte ry. Acci d e nt al sh o rt- ci rcu iti n g can occur when a met a lli c object such as a co in, clip, or pe n causes direct connectio n of th e posi tive ( ) and negat iv e (-) te rminals of the bat tery. (The se look like metal strips on the b a ttery.) This might happe n, for exampl e , w h e n y o u c a rry a sp ar e batt ery in your p o cket or purse. Sho rt-circui ting t h e te rminals may damage the bat t ery or th e connecting object. L e aving the bat tery in hot or cold p laces , s u ch as in a close d car in summer or w int er condit ions , w ill reduce the capacity and li fetime of th e batt ery. Alw a ys try to ke ep th e batt ery b e twe e n 15 ðC an d 25 ðC (5 9 ðF a n d 77ð F ). A device with a hot o r cold bat tery may not work temporarily, e v e n when the b a ttery i s fully charged. Batt ery performance is particularly limi ted in tempe rat ures we ll be low freezing. D o not dis pose of b a tteries in a fire as they may ex plode. Batte ries may als o ex plode if damag e d. Disp ose of batt eries according t o local re gul a tions . P lease recycle when pos sible. Do not dis pose as household waste .
Battery information 102 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia batter y authentication guidelines Alw a ys use original Nokia batt eries for your safety. To check th at you are get ting an origina l Nokia battery, pu rcha se it fr o m an au th orised Nokia dealer, a n d ins p ect the hologram la be l using the foll owing s teps : Succe ssful comp letion of the ste p s is n o t a tota l a ssu ra nce of th e au th e n tic ity o f t h e b a tt e ry. I f y o u h a ve any re as o n to bel ieve th at your batte ry is no t an authent ic, o riginal Nokia battery, you s h ould refrain from us ing it . If aut h e n ticity canno t be verified, ret u rn t h e batt ery to the plac e of purchase. Au th en ticat e h o logram 1 When you look at t h e hologram on th e label, you should see th e Nokia conn ec tin g ha nds s y mbol from one angle and th e Nokia Origin al Enhancements log o when l ook in g from a n other a n gle. 2 When you angl e the holo gram l e ft, right , dow n and up, y o u sh ould see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dot s on eac h side respecti v e ly .
Battery information 103 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. What if yo ur b a tt ery is no t authent ic? If y o u ca nn o t confirm th at you r Nokia battery with the hol ogram on the label is an au th en tic Nokia ba ttery, p lea se do not use the bat tery. T h e use of a batt ery that is not approved by the manufact urer may be d a ngerous and may res u lt in poor performance and damage to y o ur devic e and it s enhancements . It may al so inva lidat e an y a pprov al or wa rrant y ap plyi ng to th e device . To find out more about o riginal Nokia batt eries, v isit www.nok ia -a sia .c o m/ba tterych ec k.
Nokia original enhancements 104 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia original enhancements A new extensive range of enha n c ements is available for your phone. Select the enha ncements which accommodate your specific communication needs. List of compatible enhancements: Audio Fashion Stereo Headset HS-3 Headset HS-5 Stereo Headset HDS-3 Boom Headset HDB-4 Wireless H eadset HDW-3 Wireless Clip-on Headse t HS-21W Wireless Boom H eadset HS-4W Wireless H eadset HS-11W Wireless H eadset HS-36W Wireless H eadset HS-37W Bluetooth Headset BH-800 HS-24W Bluetooth Headset BH-900 HS-25W Wireless H eadset HS-26W Wireless Heads et HS-58W Bluetooth Headset BH-700 HS-57W Bluetooth Headset BH-200 HS-58W Wireless Headset HS-53W, 54W, 55W, 56W Audio Adapter AD-15 Music Stand MD-1 Music Pack MP-256 Inductive Loopset LPS-4 Car Headrest Handsfree BHF-3 Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-3 Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-6W Wireless Car Kit CK-1W Advanced Car Kit CK-7W Universal holder CR-39 Mobile Charger DC-4
Nokia original enhancements 105 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Carrying Carrying Case CP-70 Carrying Case CP-71 Carrying Case CP-69 Multicompatible Case CP-93 Multicompatible Fa shion Ca se CP-109 Cover Non-changeable covers Data Wireless GPS Module LD-1W Wireless GPS Module LD-3W 64 MB Reduced Size MultiMediaCard MU-1 512 MB MMCmobile MU-12 Messaging Wireless Keyboard SU-8W Digital Pen SU-1B Power Travel Charger (ACP-12 update) AC-4 Travel Charger AC-5 Battery Charging Stand DT-14 Some of the e nhancements are described in detail below. For availability of the enhanc ements , please check with your loca l dealer. A few prac tical rules for enhancements operati on: ⢠K eep the enhancements out of small children's reach. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. ⢠Check regularly that all m obile phone equipment in a vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Use only batteries, ch arger s and enhancements approved by the phone manufactur er. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may b e dangerous . Battery # Variation in operation times may occur depending on SIM card, network and usage settings, usage style and environments. Type Tech T alktime# Standby# BL-5C Li-ion Up to 215 mins Up to 260 hours
Nokia original enhancements 106 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia Wireless Boom Headset HS-4W Gain more freedom with the Nokia Wireless Boom Headset. Whether rushing to a meeting or just out for a stroll, you don't have to g o searching th rough yo ur bag or you r coat to take the call. Handsfree convenience make this light, comfortable headset a pleasure to use. It's elegant, comfortable tec hnology finely honed to the needs and rhythms of your li fe, both business and pleasure. Don't mi ss a str ide. ⢠Stylish, comfortable wireless headset ⢠Bluetooth wireless technology ⢠Convenient call handling from the headset ⢠Effortless handsfree functionality ⢠Switches easily from one ear to the other ⢠LED light for status indication Nokia Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-6W Get on the road with the Nokia Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree. This compact unit communicates with your compatible phone via Bluetooth wireless technology within a 10-meter range. âÂÂSpeech trackingâ uses four microphones selecting from 19 di rections to lock on to the direction from which speech is coming and filter out any
Nokia original enhancements 107 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. unwanted background noise coming from other areas. Plus it's easy to install - just plug it in to the vehicle's lighter socket. Key Features: ⢠W ireless connection to compatible phone via Bluetooth technology ⢠Speech tracking technology reduces background noise ⢠Answer and end calls and adjust volume from integrated buttons ⢠One-step installation: plugs in to vehicl e lighter socket ⢠Retractable cable to cha rge your compatible phone on the go Nokia Wireless Keyboard SU-8W Improve your productivity with the Nokia Wireless Keyboard. Write email, text messages, or meeting n otes quickly and easily with a ful l QWERTY keyboard. With a small, foldable, lightweight design, the Nokia Wireless Keyboard is comfortable to ca rry and use, which makes it a perfect tool for your mobile wireless of fice. Key Features: ⢠Foldable, lightweight QWERTY keyboard ⢠Power on/off key plus automatic power-off when folded ⢠S hort-cut keys for mess agi ng and main application menu of compatible phone ⢠Wireless connection to compatib le phone (Bluetooth wireless technology) ⢠3 LED's representing: Power on/off, wireless connection status, bat tery statu s ⢠P owered by 2 x AAA batteries
Care and maintenance 108 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and crafts manship and should be treated with ca re. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic ci rcuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and all ow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or st ore the device in dusty, dirt y areas. Its moving parts and electron ic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of elec tronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temper ature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards . ⢠Do not attem pt to open th e device other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handl ing can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh che micals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clea n any lenses (such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses). ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized ant e nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage th e device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of data you want to keep (such as contacts and calendar notes) before sending your device to a service facility. ⢠To reset the device from time to time for optimum performance, power off the de vice, and remove the battery. Make back-up copies of all important data. All of the above sugg estions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service.
Additional safety information 109 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Additional safety information Your device and its e nhancemen ts may co ntain small par ts. Keep them out of the re ach of sma ll children. Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and alway s switch off yo ur device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positio ns. This device meets RF expos ure guidelines whe n used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm (5/8 inches) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is use d for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and sh ould position the device the above-stated distance from your bo dy. In order to transmit data files or message s, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are follo we d until the transmiss ion is compl eted. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device . Do not plac e credit cards or ot her magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transm itting equipment, including wireless devi ces, may interfer e w ith the functionality of inadequately protected medical devi ces. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your de vice in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care fa cilities may be using equipment that could be sensi tive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufa cturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cm (6 inch es) be maintained betwee n a wireless phone and a pacema ker to avoid potential interference with the pacemake r. These recommendations are consistent with the indepe ndent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should do the following: ⢠Always keep the device more than 15.3 cm (6 inches) from the pacemaker. ⢠Not carry the device in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference.
Additional safety information 110 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. If you suspect interference, swit ch off your device, and move the device away. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provide r. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperl y installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electroni c antiskid (antilock) braking systems, e lectronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your ve hicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device , or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly t hat all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating pro perly. Do not s tore or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, reme mber that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or port able wireless eq uipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly insta lled, and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft , disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive en vironments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphe re, and obey all signs and instruct ions. Potentially expl osive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as ne ar gas pumps at s ervice stations. Observe restrictions on the us e of radio e quipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive at mosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include b elow deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or part icles such as grain, dust, or metal powders.
Additional safety information 111 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this d evice, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the device is not on, swit ch it on. Check for adeq uate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press the end key as many t imes as needed to clear the display and ready th e device for calls. 3 Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numb ers vary by location. 4 Press the call key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can ma ke an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible . Your wireless device may be the only means of comm unication at the scene of an accident. Do not end t he call un til given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) THIS MOBILE DEVICE MEETS GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limit s for expo sure to radio waves recommended by international guideli nes. These guideline s were developed by independent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins design ed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guideline s is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg)* averaged over t en grams of tis sue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be belo w the maximum value because the device is designed to use on ly the power required to reach the network. T hat amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a ne twork base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at t he ear is 0.76 W/kg. Use of device accessories and enhancements ma y result in different SAR values. SAR valu es may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia-asia.com.
112 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Index A Access points 87 settings 88 Activation keys 97 Adding text 28 Alarms alarm clock 3 calendar 60 Applications installing 95 Applications, Java 95 B Backing up 5 Bluetooth 74 connecting two devices, pairing 76 device address 76 factory set passcode 76 headset 94 pairing 76 passcode, glossary explanation 76 security 75 switching off 77 Bookmarks 63 Brightness display 86 setting in camera 25 C Cache, clearing 66 Calendar alarm 59 creating entries 59 synchronising PC Suite 60 Call register See log Calls dialled numbers 14 duration 14 international 11 received 14 settings 86 settings for call divert 93 transferring 14 Camera adjusting bri ghtness 20 , 25 adjusting colour and lighting 23 adjusting flash sett ings 20 edit videos 27 flash 22 image setup settings 20 , 23 modes 23 saving vid eo clips 25 self-timer 22 sending images 1 , 21 sequence mode 21 still image camera settings 22 video recorder settings 26 Cameras 20 CD-ROM 78 Certif icates 91 Chat See instant messaging Clear screen See standby mode Clock 3 alarm 3 settings 3 Codes 90 lock code PIN code 91 PIN2 code 91 security code 91
113 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Computer connections 77 Conference call 11 Connection settings 87 Contact cards storing DTMF tones 14 Contacts 17 inserting images 17 sending 17 Copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory 18 text 43 Copyright protection See activation keys Cutting text 43 D Data conne ctions details 79 ending 78 Date 3 Digital rights management, DRM See activation keys DNS, do main name service, glos sary explanation 89 E Editing videos adding effects 27 adding sound clips 27 adding transitions 27 custom video clips 27 E-mail 44 automatic retrieving 49 offline 50 opening 48 Remote mailbox 47 retrieving from mailbox 48 settings 53 viewing attachments 49 F File formats .jar 96 .sis 95 JAD file 95 JAR file 95 RealOne Player 36 File manager 4 Fixed dialling 18 FM radio 56 G Gallery adding files to album 31 creating new album 31 ordering files in albums 30 , 32 viewing images and videos 30 H Handsfree See loudspeaker Headset settin gs 94 Help application 1 I Instant messaging 70 blocking 71 connecting to a server 70 groups 73 recording messages 72 sending instant messages 71 user ID, glossary ex planation 72 Internet See Web Internet access points (IA P) See access points IP address, glossary ex planation 89 J Java See applications, Java L Lock code 91 Log erasing contents 16 filtering 15
114 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Log duration 16 Loopset settings 94 Loudspeaker 4 M Mailbox 47 automati c retr ieving 49 Media files fast forward 37 file formats 36 mute sound 37 rewind 37 Memory clearing memory 5 , 14, 15 viewing memory consumption 5 Memory card 5 Menu, rearranging 7 Messaging e-mail 44 multimedia messages 44 text messages 44 Modes image modes 24 video modes 24 Movies, muvees custom muvees 38 quick muvees 38 Multimedia messages 44 Music player 68 Mute sound 37 N Nokia original enhancements 10 4 P Packet data connections 78 GPRS, glossary explanation 87 settings 89 Pasting text 43 PC connections via Bluetooth o r USB cable 77 PC Suite calendar data 60 synchronisation 77 transferring images to a PC 29 transferring media files 5 transferring music files to your memory card 36 viewing device memory data 4 Personalisation 9 Phonebook See cont acts PIN code 91 Profiles 8 R Radio 56 Reminder See calendar, alarm Remote mailbox 47 Resolution, glossary expl anation 23 Ringing tones personal ringing tone 19 receiving in a text message 47 S Security code See lock code Sending contact cards, busin ess cards 17 images 1 , 21 video clips 28 Service commands 40 Settings access codes 90 access points 88 Bluetooth connection 75 calendar 60 call barring 93 call diverting 93 certificates 91 data connections 87 date and time 90 display 86 headset 94 IM 70 , 73
115 Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. language 85 lock co de 91 loopset 94 original settings 85 Personalising the phone 7 PIN code 91 screen save r 86 Shortcuts 1 SIM card copying names and numbers to device 18 messages 51 names and num bers 18 sis file 95 SMS centre, short message service centr e 51 Snooze 3 Software transferring a file to your device 95 Sound clips 29 Sounds muting a ring ing tone 13 recording sounds 84 Speed dialli ng 12 Standby mode 7 Synchronisation 79 T Text message service centre adding new 51 Text messages 44 Themes 9 Time 3 Transferring content from another devi ce 9 U USB cable 77 USSD commands 40 V Video clips 29 Video player See RealPlayer Visual Radio 56 viewing content 57 visual service ID 57 Voice commands 94 Voice dialling 12 Voice mailbox 11 changing the phone number 11 diverting calls to voice mailbox 93 Voice messages 11 Voice tags 94 making calls 12 Volume control 4 during a call 11 Loudspeaker 4 W Web access points, See access points browser 62 R1140_enIX.fm Page 115 Wedne sday, Februa ry 28, 2007 9:24 AM
Copyright é 2006 Nokia. All rights re s erved. Nokia Care Online The Nokia Care we b suppor t provid es you w ith m ore infor mation on our on line service s. INTE RA CTIVE D EMONSTR ATI ONS Learn how to set up your phone for the first time , and find out more about its features. Intera ctive Dem onstrations give step-by-step in structi ons on u sing yo ur phone. USERâ S GUID E The online Userâ s Guide c ontains de tailed inform ation on your ph one. Reme mber to c heck regularly for up dates. SOFTWARE Make the most of your phone wit h software fo r your phone and PC. Nokia PC Suite connects your ph one and PC so you c an m anage your ca lendar, c ontacts , music an d image s, while other application s complement its use. SETTINGS Certain ph one fun ctions, such as mul timedia me ssaging , mobile brow sing and ema il*, may require settin gs be fore you can us e them. Have th em sent to your phone f ree of charge. *Not available on all phones . INTERACTIVE DEMONST RATIONS SOFTWARE USER âÂÂS GU ID E SETTINGS
Copyright é 2 006 Nokia. A ll rights rese rved. HOW DO I USE MY PHONE ? The Set U p secti on, at www.nokia-asia.com/setup , helps y ou prepare yo ur phone for use . Familiarise yo urself with phone functions and featu res by refer ring to the Guides and Demos s ection at www.nokia-asia.com/guides . HOW DO I SYNCHRON ISE MY PHONE AND PC? Connecting your phon e to a compatible PC with the requisite Nokia PC Suite v ersion from www.nokia-asia.com/pcsuite lets yo u sy nchr on ise your cal enda r a nd co nt act s. WHERE CAN I GET SOFTWARE FOR M Y PHONE? Get more ou t of your phone with downloads fr om the Software section at www.n okia-asia.co m/softwa re . WHERE CAN I FIND ANSWERS TO COMMON QUESTIONS? Look up the FAQ section at www.nokia-asia.com/faq for answers to your questions on y our phone and other Nokia products and serv ic es. HOW DO I KEEP UP WIT H NOKIA NE WS? Subscribe online at www.nokia- asia.com/signup an d be the fir st to know about the latest products and promotions. Sign up for "Nokia Connecti ons" to rec eive monthl y updates on latest phones and technology. Sign up fo r "Be The Firs t To Know" to get exclusi ve previews of new phone announcements or subscribe to "Promo tional Communications" for upcoming events. Should you still require further assistance, please ref er to www.n okia-as ia.com/con tactus . For addition al informati on on repair serv ices, ple ase visit www.nokia-asia.com/repair . Please visit your own coun try site for mor e details: Australia and New Zealand ww w.noki a.co m.au/ suppo rt Malay sia www.n okia.c om.my/s uppo rt Indi a ww w.noki a.co .in/sup port Phili ppin es www.no kia.com .ph/s uppo rt Indo nesi a ww w.nokia .co.id /support Si ng apo re www.no kia.com .sg/su pport Jap an ww w.nokia .co.jp /support Th ai lan d www.no kia.co.th /suppo rt If your countr y is not listed above, ple ase visit www.n okia-asia. com/s uppo rt .